2012 Ram Truck Chassis Cab Owner's Manual Chassiscab

User Manual: 2012-chassiscab

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 502

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2012 Ram Truck Chassis Cab

Chrysler Group LLC
12DD43-126-AA

First Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

Ra m Tr u c k

2012
OWNER’S MANUAL

CHASSIS CAB

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t
drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a
friend, or use public transportation.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features
and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features
and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered
on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Van Conversions/Campers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number

.............. 6

䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.

NOTE:
After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

INTRODUCTION 5

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions
are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for
assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the
applicable manufacturer.

For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to:
www.dodgebodybuilder.com. This website contains dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It
is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body support. For service issues, contact your authorized
modifications or special equipment installed by van dealer.
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. Refer
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Such
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
the windshield. This number also appears on the bottom
service on these items, contact the applicable manufacof the frame rail, on the right hand side, near the center
turer.
of the vehicle and underbody as well as the Automobile
Operating instructions for the special equipment in- Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
stalled by the conversion/camper manufacturer should your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

INTRODUCTION 7

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.

Vehicle Identification Number

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2

CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 19

▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . 20
䡵 Illuminated Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 20
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 21
▫ Remote Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 25

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 25

▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 48

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

▫ Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 26

▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 49

▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 31
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 52
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

▫ Power Windows – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . .
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Air Bag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . 54
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 57
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

. . . 77
. . . 77
. . . 77
. . . 78
. . . 79
. . . 81

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may use a keyless ignition system. This
system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
with integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch with either side up.

Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) — If Equipped
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.

Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped
Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition
system. The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle
has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place. You can insert the
double-sided standard blade key into the ignition switch
with either side up.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1
2
3
4

— OFF
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission). Turn the Key Fob to the OFF
then pull the key out with your other hand.
position and then remove the Key Fob.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minEmergency Key Removal
utes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
into the lock cylinder with either side up.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.

CAUTION!
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your
Key Fob will become locked in the ignition.
• Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in
this condition, damage could occur to the Key Fob
or ignition module. Only remove the emergency
key for locking and unlocking the doors.
• Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either:
• Jump Start the vehicle.
• Charge the battery.

WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
a chime will sound to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE:
• The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the
Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position.

• If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) the EVIC will display “Key In Ignition”.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid
Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

NOTE: A Key Fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.

CAUTION!

The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatDuring normal operation, after turning on the ignition
ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
problems and loss of security protection.
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Key Fob to try to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off after Replacement Keys
two seconds.
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec- vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys威 from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.

• If a programmed Key Fob is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining Key Fobs erased from the
system’s memory. This will prevent the lost Key Fobs
from starting your vehicle. The remaining Keys Fobs
must then be reprogrammed.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE:
• This device must accept any interference that may be
• When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System
received, including interference that may cause undeserviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authosired operation.
rized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Vehicle Security Alarm is activated, interior switches for
door locks are disabled. The system provides both audible and visible signals, for the first three minutes the
horn will sound and the headlights will turn on, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security
Light will flash repeatedly. For an additional 15 minutes
only, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or
turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.

To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the
power door locks, or use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter to lock the doors. After all the doors are
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about
16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After
the alarm is set, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a
slower rate to indicate that the system is armed.

To Disarm The System
Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door. If something
Rearming Of The System
has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence,
The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 the horn will sound three times when you unlock the
additional minutes of headlights turning on and Vehicle doors and the exterior lights will blink three times. Check
Security Light flashing, if the system has not been the vehicle for tampering.
disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
present, the system will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if a programmed Sentry Key威 is inserted into the ignition
switch. To exit the alarming mode, press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button, or insert a programmed Sentry
Key威 into the ignition switch.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.

NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courSecurity System Manual Override
tesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
the “Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
doors using the manual door lock plunger.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors
and activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a Key Fob with RKE
transmitter. The transmitter does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
RKE transmitters.

Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter

Remote Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door (If EVIC is
setup for driver door first, otherwise this will unlock all
doors), or press the unlock button twice within five

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will than ten seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated button while still holding the LOCK button.
entry system will also turn on.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressThis feature lets you program the system to unlock either
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
removed.
current setting, proceed as follows:
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elecits previous setting.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerProgrammable Features (System Setup)” in “Under- NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the
information.
Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate
following procedure:
the Vehicle Security Alarm System.
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerProgrammable Features (System Setup)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.

3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
following procedure:
Vehicle Security Alarm System.
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer
than ten seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button
while still holding the UNLOCK button.

To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

2. Release both buttons at the same time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerProgrammable Features (System Setup)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.

3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to
sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the Vehicle Security Alarm System.
following procedure:
Using The Panic Alarm
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans- To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
mitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than ten hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still hold- least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
the headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
ing the LOCK button.
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
turn on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless Transmitter Battery Replacement
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph battery.
(8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
housing or the printed circuit board.
and horn will remain on.
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
during removal.
by the system.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
Programming Additional Transmitters
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
contact your authorized dealer for details.
rubbing alcohol.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
halves together.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
following conditions:
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• This device must accept any interference received,
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
including interference that may cause undesired
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveoperation.
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly apapproximately
300 ft (91 m).
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE transmitter may reduce this range.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
• Fuel meets minimum requirement
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle theft alarm not active

WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar

• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.

• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.

• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.

• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.

To Enter Remote Start Mode
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
Press and release the REMOTE START button
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
on the RKE transmitter twice within five secthe ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the
third cycle.
vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15 minutes.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
NOTE:
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
will automatically lock the doors.
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

message “Turn To On” will flash in the EVIC until you
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
• “Remote Start Active — Key To Run” will display in
Start request.
the EVIC until you insert and turn the key to ON/
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
RUN position. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
Center (EVIC)” for further information.
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System
When remote start is activated, the heated steering
(if equipped). Insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position remote start is activated. These features will stay on
in order to drive the vehicle.
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/ The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
Turn To On” will flash in the EVIC until you insert the deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Key Fob into the ignition switch. Once inserted, the Center (EVIC). For more information on Remote Start
Comfort System operation refer to “Electronic Vehicle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features (System Setup)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock
knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up.
Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle
without lifting the lock knob.
Doors locked before closing will remain locked when
closed.
The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on
your vehicle.

WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door LOCK switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.

Power Door Lock Switch Location
1 - Unlock

2 - Lock

If you press the power door LOCK switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking your Key Fob in the vehicle. Removing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the
ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to
remove the Key Fob.

Auto Unlock Doors Programming — If Equipped
The Auto Unlock Doors feature can be enabled or disabled as follows:

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.

For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(System Setup)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.

Auto Unlock Doors — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
either front door is opened. This will occur only after the
vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the
vehicle has been driven (shifted out of PARK and all
doors closed).

NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle
have the Child-Protection Door Lock system.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

Child-Protection Door Lock Location

Child Lock Control

To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to
engage and disengage the Child-Protection locks. When
the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be
opened by using the outside door handle even if the
inside door lock is in the unlocked position.

WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
WINDOWS
• After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
Power Windows – If Equipped
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.

Power Window Switches
1 – Left Front
2 – Right Front

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

3 – Right Rear
4 – Left Rear

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

The control on the left front door panel has UP-DOWN
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
the front passenger door for passenger window control
and on the rear doors of the Crew Cab models. The
windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON/RUN or ACC position, and for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until a front door
is opened.

WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.

Auto-Down
NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
Both the driver and front passenger window switch have
power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the
an Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch past the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
first detent, release, and the window will go down
either front door is opened.
automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To open the window part way, press to the first detent conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure. If this happens, pull the
and release it when you want the window to stop.
switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
window manually.
(4-Door Models Driver And Front Passenger Door
Only) — If Equipped
WARNING!
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically. There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
window before closing.
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to Auto-Up Reset
the first detent and release when you want the window to It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the
stop.
Auto-up/Auto-down feature. To do so, perform the
following steps:
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road additional two seconds after the window is closed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.

Window LOCKOUT Switch (4–Door Models Only)
The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver’s door
allows you to disable the window control on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors, press the window LOCK button
into the latched or down position. To enable the window
controls, press the window LOCK button again and
return the switch to the released or up position.

Window Lockout Switch
1 – Window Lockout Switch

Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down or in partially open positions. This is a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the rear • All seat belt systems (except driver’s regular/Crew
windows are open and buffeting occurs, open the front
Cab威, first and second row center position for Crew
and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
Cab威 only) include Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
Some of the most important safety features in your seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
vehicle are the restraint systems:
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and infant and child restraint systems. For further information, refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
all passengers
(LATCH)”.
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenNOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
ger — if equipped
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
wheel
severity and type of collision.
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.

Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Crew Cab front center
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
seating position have combination lap/shoulder belts.
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
far away from home or on your own street.
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the belt will
lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.

Pulling Out Latch Plate And Webbing

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

WARNING!
• A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)

Latch Plate To Buckle

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

Removing Slack From Belt
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in a
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.

WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the air bag deployed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

Regular Cab Front Center Three Point Belt
1. The front center seat belt on the Regular Cab may be
disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas
behind the front seats. The black latch plate can be
detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on
the inboard side of the passenger seat. Insert the seat belt
tongue into the center red slot on the black buckle. The
black buckle latch plate can be removed when the seat
belt tongue is pressed into the buckle. Allow the retractor
to take up the extra webbing, and the buckles will hang
vertically from the cab back exit bezel, thus freeing up all
the area behind the front seats.

Detaching Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue

2. To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat, pull
the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back
panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there
is an audible “click”. For proper seat belt usage, refer
“Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• If the black latch and black buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
• When reattaching the black latch and black
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the black latch and
black buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the black latch and black buckle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Inserting Latch Plate

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

WARNING!

In Use Position

• If the black latch and black buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
• When reattaching the black latch and black
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the black latch and
black buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the black latch and black buckle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
away from your neck. Press the button located on the
upper belt guide, and then move it up or down to the
position that fits you best.

As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Center Lap Belts
The center seating position for the Crew Cab front seat
has a lap belt only. To fasten the lap belt, slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ To lengthen
the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull. To remove slack,
pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug
against the hips. Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust
the belt as tightly as is comfortable.

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

Regular Cab

WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous.
• A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down
and under the belt in a collision.
• A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash
forces to the abdomen, not to the stronger hip
bones. In either case, the risk of internal injuries is
greater. Wear a lap belt low and snug.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or
a cinching latch plate which are used to secure a child
restraint system. For additional information refer to
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
under the “Child Restraint” section. The chart below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.

First Row

Left
N/A

Center
ALR

Right
ALR

• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
Crew Cab威
First Row
Second Row

Left
N/A
ALR

Center
N/A
Cinch

Right
ALR
ALR

• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupants mid-section so as to not

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. However, the belt will still retract to remove slack
in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and younger should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Center Lap Belts — Crew Cab威 Only
The front center seating position has a lap belt only. To
fasten the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a “click.” To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the
latch plate and pull. To remove slack, pull the loose end
of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against the hips.
Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust the belt as
tightly as is comfortable.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.

unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual
notification.

The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deacOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
tivating BeltAlert威.
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu- while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is BeltAlert威) seat belt remains unfastened.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended, your
authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt
extender. This extender should be used only if the
existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required,
remove the extender and store it.

WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
Driver and Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bag
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger (if equipped) as a supplement
to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced
Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering
wheel. The passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the
air bag covers.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bags
(if equipped)

2 — Knee Bolster

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.

NOTE:
•
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for
Advanced Air Bags.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
authorized dealer immediately.
driver and front passenger (if equipped) air bags. This
Air Bag System Components
system provides output appropriate to the severity and
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint
system components:
Controller (ORC).
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
• Air Bag Warning Light
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
• Steering Wheel and Column
used for more severe collisions.
• Instrument Panel

WARNING!

• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors

• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.

WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.

Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
Knee Impact Bolsters
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltThe Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
driver and the front passenger, and position front occu- child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
their arm.
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need
Assistance⬙.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
WARNING!
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
You should read the instructions provided with your
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
belts properly.
air bags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags room to inflate.
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce subOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colliThe ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
required for this vehicle.
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
The ORC determines if deployment of the front air bags impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
in a frontal or side collision is required. Based on the with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic ORC deploys severe initial deceleration.
the Advanced Front Air Bags, and front seat belt pretenBecause air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
sioners — if equipped, as required, depending on several
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
factors, including the severity and type of impact.
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi- have deployed.
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collicertain frontal collisions depending on several factors,
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
including the severity and type of collision. Advanced
away from an inflating air bag.
Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side or rollover collisions.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the LOCK
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.

It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel (if
equipped). When the ORC detects a collision requiring
the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation
rates are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out
of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The air
bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is
about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.

The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.

you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
or all of the following may occur:
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s infront passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
structions for cleaning.
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
NOTE: Front air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- Maintaining Your Air Bag System
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
WARNING!
bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!
Deployed air bags cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.

• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.

WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.

Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
Infants And Child Restraints
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardChildren 12 years or younger should ride properly facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
the rear seats rather than in the front.
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.

WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air
bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!
• Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
air bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat.

NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web- Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/ restraint:
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

you make sure that you can install the child restraint in • If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it.
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
weight and height limits.
try a different seating position.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
not work when you need it.
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.

WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.

• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt, instead securing the child
restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps
from the child restraint to the vehicle structure. LATCH
child restraint anchorage systems are installed in the
Quad Cab威, Mega Cab威 and Crew Cab rear seat outboard
positions. LATCH equipped seating positions feature
both lower anchor bars, located at the back of the seat

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

cushion, and tether strap anchorages, located behind the Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
seat back (refer to “Child Restraint Tether Anchor”).
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the seat back tether anchorage have been available for
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
older products.

Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side

Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
Installing The Child Restraint System
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
WARNING!
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
Do not install child restraint systems equipped with
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
LATCH mechanisms in the center position of a Crew
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
Cab model with a bench rear seat. A child may be
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
placed in the rear center seating position of a Crew
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
Cab bench model using the seat belt and child tether
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
anchorage. The LATCH anchorages in the rear seat
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
are designed for the two outboard seating positions
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
for Crew Cab威 with a full bench rear seat, and all
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
three positions for Crew Cab威 with a split bench rear
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
seat. Failure to follow this may result in serious or
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
fatal injury.
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
• If your child restraint seat is not LATCH-compatible,
install the restraint using the vehicle seat belting.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
WARNING!
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
Improper
installation
of a child restraint to the
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
LATCH
anchorages
can
lead to failure of an infant or
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
child
restraint.
The
child
could be badly injured or
connector, and a means for adjusting the tension in the
killed.
Follow
the
manufacturer’s
directions exactly
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
when
installing
an
infant
or
child
restraint.
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
tension in the strap.
Belt
In general, you will first loosen the child seat adjusters on The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor
easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchor- (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat
ages and tether anchorages. Then tighten all three straps belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
as you push the child restraint rearward and downward tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary
into the seat.
to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc- then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For
additional information on ALR, refer to “Automatic
tions that come with the child restraint system.
Locking Mode”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The chart below defines the seating positions with an Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
plate.
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
Regular Cab
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next,
Left
Center
Right
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
First Row
N/A
ALR
ALR
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
• N/A — Not Applicable
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
Crew Cab威
First Row
Second Row

Left
N/A
ALR

Center
N/A
Cinch

• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor

Right
ALR
ALR

2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
Installing a Child Restraint with a Cinching Latch Plate:
1. To install a child restraint with a cinching latch plate,
first, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

retractor to route it through the belt path of the child Regular Cab models have two tether anchorages, one
restraint. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you each behind the front center and right seats. Crew Cab
models have three anchorages, one behind each of the
hear a “click.”
rear seats.
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
WARNING!
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
• Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat, even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the anchor
preferably between the head restraint posts under- positions directly behind the child seat to secure a
neath the head restraint.
child restraint top tether strap. Follow the instructions below. See your authorized dealer for help if
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
necessary.
Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to tether anchors have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for their older products.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Tether Anchorage Points at the Right and Center
Front Seat (Regular Cab - All Seats)
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under
the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
2. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to
the square opening in the sheet metal.
3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap to Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence
(Crew Cab — Rear Seats)
Crew Cab

1. The tether straps loops are located between the rear
glass and the rear seat. There is a tether strap loop located
behind each seating position. You can gain access to the
center seating position tether strap loop by raising the
head restraint and reaching between the rear glass and
rear seat.

Head Restraint Adjustment

2. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint, through the outboard tether strap loop, then
route it to the tether strap loop located directly behind
the center rear seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint
and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat.
4. Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center
seat, and attach the hooks to the anchor loop.
5. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint through the center seat tether strap loop and
anchor to the tether strap loop located behind either
outboard seating positions.
6. Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

Multiple Child Restraint Crew Cab
1
2
3
4
5
6

— Anchor Loops
— Snap Hook
— Tether Strap
— Passenger’s Side Rear Child Seat
— Rear Center Child Seat
— Driver’s Side Rear Child Seat

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). considered a normal part of the break-in and not interAfter the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or preted as an indication of difficulty.
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
SAFETY TIPS
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Transporting Passengers
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
mental and should be avoided.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the or retractor condition, replace the belt.
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- Air Bag Warning Light
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.

WARNING! (Continued)
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

WARNING! (Continued)
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects

lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 87
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 89
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped . . . . 91

▫ “Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . 92
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 93
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 123

▫ 40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . 140

▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 123 䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . 128
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . 130
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped . . . . . . 136
▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . 137

▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
䡵 Lights

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 148

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85

▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 153
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
䡵 Driver Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . 158
䡵 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped

. . . . . . 159

䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 Overhead Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 163

▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

▫ Center Storage Compartment —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
䡵 Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

▫ Seatback Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Storage (Regular Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

▫ Storage And Seats (Crew Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . 179

䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
(Regular Cab Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders —
(40–20–40 Seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Rear Cupholder — Crew Cab . . . . . . . . . . . 173
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Glove Box Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Power Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Manual Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87

MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window. The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).

Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control lever under the mirror to the night position (lever
flipped toward the rear of vehicle).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

Automatic Dimming Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89

WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in a passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex right side
mirror.

Folding Mirror

Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage.

CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full
rearward position to resist damage when entering a
car wash or a narrow location.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.

Power Mirror Controls
1 — Mirror Select Buttons
2 — Mirror Control

Power Mirror Controls

To adjust a mirror, press the mirror select button for the
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but- mirror that you want to adjust. Using the mirror control
tons and a four-way mirror control switch.
switch, press on any of the four arrows for the direction
that you want the mirror to move.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91

Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.

Power Mirror Movement

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated by pressing the rear window
defroster button.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the
sun.
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor
downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the
“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired
position.

Slide-On-Rod Extender

Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
head to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped in or
out).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93

Trailer Towing Position

Blindspot Mirror

NOTE: Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
entering an automated car wash.
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone alA small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
and can be adjusted separately.
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi- Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
microphone for private conversation.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Ver- The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
supported phones.
standard that enables different electronic devices to conFor Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
websites:
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
• or call 1–877–855–8400
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95

WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.

Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.

The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
Uconnect™ Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if details.
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehibutton and Voice Com(Uconnect™ Phone
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
button) that will enable you to
mand
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
access the system. When you press the button you will
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep
switch), if so equipped.
is your signal to give a command.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.

example, you can use the compound form voice
command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break
the compound form command into two voice commands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.

• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for Voice Command Tree
the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or an- Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
other prompt.
Help Command
• For certain operations, compound commands can be If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”.
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For

To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97

Cancel Command
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
and follow the audible prompts.
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identifew instances the system will take you back to the
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
previous menu.
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
after the initial pairing process.
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile
To complete the pairing process, you will need to referphone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
given a unique phone name.
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
pairing instructions:
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
• Press the
button to begin.
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority
“Device Pairing”.
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the • The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
of certain radios.
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile
Call By Saying A Name
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
button to begin.
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to • Press the
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Dial By Saying A Number
“Call”.
• Press the

button to begin.

• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previwant to call.
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99

• The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
may appear in the display of certain radios.
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry, if desired.
Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
phonebook entry that you are adding.
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone• Press the
button to begin.
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
“Phonebook New Entry”.
main menu.
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recommended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
instead of “Bob”.

The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downTransfer From Mobile Phone
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availUconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availnames) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
able for use.
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
phone is accessible.
website for supported phones.
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
• To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phonedownloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in
book.
“Call by Saying a Name” section.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transmade to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
start the vehicle.
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101

After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
NOTE:
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
to the main menu.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
deleted or edited.
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
• Press the
button to begin.
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Entry” feature.
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
entry that you wish to edit.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
• Press the
button to begin.
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries

• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
phonebook entry that you are editing.
“Phonebook Delete”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
button while the
from the list, press the
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
“Delete”.

Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
• Press the

button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.

• After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, • Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
deleted or edited.
language is deleted.
List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
button to begin.
• Press the
deleted or edited.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
“Phonebook List Names”.
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
your mobile service provider for the features that you
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonehave.
book entries, if available.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
Currently In Progress
button during the playing of the desired name, and
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
say “Call”.
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sysNOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
button to accept the call. To reject the
call. Press the
operations at this point.
button until you hear a single
call, press and hold the
• The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
number designation you wish to call.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
• The selected number will be dialed.
Currently In Progress
Phone Call Features
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
The following features can be accessed through the incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your call waiting that you normally hear when using your
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

mobile phone. Press the
button to place the current Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
button until you hear a single beep.
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Toggling Between Calls
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
button until you hear a single beep,
press the
Progress
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
time.
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is Conference Call
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
button until you hear a
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer hold), press and hold the
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
to “Conference Call” in this section.
joined into one conference call.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105

Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the
Redial
• Press the

button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial”.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain dura- voice commands will be in that language.
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone• An active call is automatically transferred to the book is usable. The paired phone name is not languagemobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF. specific and is usable across all languages.
Uconnect™ Phone Features

Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:

Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
using:
number for your area.
• Press the
button to begin.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
• Press the
button to begin.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.

WARNING!
To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect™ System,
• and have network coverage.

NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may Towing Assistance
not be applicable with the available mobile service and If you need towing assistance:
area.
• Press the
button to begin.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button and say
some systems. To do this, press the
“Towing Assistance”.
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your • The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528for the mobile phone directly.
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
“Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Towing Assistance references.

Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.

• If supported, this number may be programmable on You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
button and say mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
some systems. To do this, press the
“Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
service or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some
Paging
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Uconnect™ Phone.
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
Voice Mail Calling
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
with Automated Systems”.
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying
press the
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

is also to be used for navigating through an automated Barge In — Overriding Prompts
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
number on a pager.
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
could press the
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
button and say, “Send.” The
call and then press the
the voice prompt.
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send. Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
tones over the phone.
• Press the
button to begin.
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
network configurations. This is normal.
one of the following:
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
use of this feature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.

NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation,
after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the
call did not go through even though the call is in progress.
Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.

Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
• Press the
button.
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile • Following the beep, say “Mute”.
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
• Press the
button.
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

Advanced Phone Connectivity

List Paired Mobile Phone Names

Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the
button
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
and say “Transfer Call”.

• Press the

button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
• When prompted, say “List Phones”.

• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
button and
phone being announced, press the
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two secelectronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
tions for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
with one electronic device at a time.
paired phone.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威 Select Another Mobile Phone
connection between your mobile phone and the This feature allows you to select and start using another
Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions de- phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
• Press the
button to begin.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • You can also press the
button at any time while the
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
list is being played, and then choose the phone you
wish to delete.
• You can also press the
button at any time while the
list is being played, and then choose the phone that Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
call. If the selected phone is not available, the To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
Voice Training
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizDelete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones
ing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
button to begin.
• Press the
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
radio mode):
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
• Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
prompts.
the session begins, or,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

• Press the
button and say the “Voice Training, This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and Voice Command
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
best results, the Voice Training session should be comprovide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
you.
Reset
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
• press the
button.
during a Voice Command period.
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
• Performance is maximized under:
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,

• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.

• fully closed windows,

• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.

• dry weather condition.

• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).

• Even though the system is designed for users speaking • Even though international dialing for most number
in North American English, French, and Spanish accombinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
cents, the system may not always work for some.
number combinations may not be supported.
• When navigating through an automated system such • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
compromised with the convertible top down.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
Far End Audio Performance
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
• Audio quality is maximized under:
not in motion is recommended.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.

Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls.
SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.

• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
Read Messages:
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
If you wish to hear the new message:
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • Press the
button.
compromised with the convertible top down.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
• Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for
you.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward” List of Preset Messages:
the message using Uconnect™ Phone.
1. Yes
Send Messages:
2. No
You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
3. Where are you?
a new message:
• Press the

button.

4. I need more direction.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say 5.
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
6.
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
7.
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
8.
button while the
To send a message, press the
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
9.

LOL
Why
I love you
Call me
Call me later

Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or 10. Thanks
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
11. See You in 15 minutes
12. I am on my way
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

13. I’ll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet
19. Send number to call

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.

Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
the system from announcing the new incoming mes- system.
sages.
20. Start without me

• Press the

button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all

Voice Commands
Alternate(s)

Primary
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial

Voice Commands
Alternate(s)

pairing
phone book

Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.

NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.

WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
button, you
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists The system will best recognize your speech if the winbutton, listen dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
options, press the Voice Command
set to low.
for the beep, and say your command.
button while the
Pressing the Voice Command
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.

At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Combutton and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
mand

Commands
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
The Voice Command system understands two types of
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
commands. Universal commands are available at all
These commands are universal and can be used from any times. Local commands are available if the supported
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon radio mode is active.
the active application.
Changing the Volume
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
a normal speaking volume.
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Radio AM
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for this mode, you may say the following commands:
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
Main Menu
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
menu.
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
Radio FM
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Setup” (to switch to system setup)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)

Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:

• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

Satellite Radio
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com- • “Next Track” (to play the next track)
mands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
spoken number)
Memo
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
− “Save” (to save the memo)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

− “Continue” (to continue recording)

• “Switch to system setup”

− “Delete” (to delete the recording)

• “Change to setup”

• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Main menu setup” or
— During the playback you may press the Voice
• “Switch to setup”
button to stop playing memos. You
Command
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)

• “Language English”

− “Next” (to play the next memo)

• “Language French”

− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)

• “Language Spanish”

− “Delete” (to delete a memo)

• “Tutorial”

• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)

• “Voice Training”

Setup
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
To switch to system setup, you may say on of the Command
button first and wait for the beep before
following:
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
• “Change to setup”

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.

WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new Some models may be equipped with an eight-way drivuser. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only. er’s power seat. The power seat switches are located on
the outboard side of the driver’s seat cushion.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the There are two power seat switches that are used to
control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatvehicle.
back.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when you have reached the desired position.

Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when you have reached the desired position.

Reclining The Seatback
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when you have reached the desired position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a six-way power passenger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when you have reached the desired position.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
have reached the desired position.

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.

WARNING! (Continued)
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support.

Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.

WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)

Lumbar Control Switch

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

Press the switch once to select HIGHlevel heating. Press the switch a second time to select LOW-level heating.
Press the switch a third time to shut
the heating elements OFF.

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.

3
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.

Front Heated Seats
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The • The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
controls for each seat are located near the bottom center
of the instrument panel (below the climate controls).
The heated seats switch from HIGH to LOW and from
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. LOW to OFF automatically, based on time and temperaAmber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of ture of the seat. The heated seats can operate on HIGH
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for heat for a maximum of 60 minutes before switching to
LOW heat. Once a seat has switched to the LOW heat
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
setting it may operate for a maximum of 45 minutes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

before automatically shutting OFF. The heated seats can indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
shut OFF early or may not turn on when the seat is use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, one
for LOW and none for OFF.
already warm.
Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.

Press the switch once to select HIGHlevel heating. Press the switch a second time to select LOW-level heating.
Press the switch a third time to shut
the heating elements OFF.

Rear Heated Seats
NOTE:
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these
two to five minutes.
seats are located on the rear of the center console.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear
operate.
passengers to operate the seats independently. You can
choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Amber The heated seats switch from HIGH to LOW and from
LOW to OFF automatically, based on time and temperature of the seat. The heated seats can operate on HIGH
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

Press the switch once to choose HIGH,
press it a second time to choose LOW.
Pressing the switch a third time will
turn the ventilated seat OFF. When
HIGH speed is selected both lights on
the switch will be illuminated. When
LOW speed is selected one light will
be illuminated.

heat for a maximum of 60 minutes before switching to
LOW heat. Once a seat has switched to the LOW heat
setting it may operate for a maximum of 45 minutes
before automatically shutting OFF. The heated seats can
shut OFF early or may not turn on when the seat is
already warm.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler
in higher ambient temperatures.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models equipped with remote start, the drivers
ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a
The ventilated seat switches are located in the switch remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If
bank in the center stack of the instrument panel, just Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
below the climate controls. The fans operate at two Vehicle” for further information.
speeds, HIGH and LOW.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped
Both front seats are independently adjustable forward or
rearward and are equipped with a seatback recliner. The
manual forward or rearward seat adjustment handle is
found under the seat cushion at the front edge of each
seat. Pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or
backward to move the seat into the most comfortable
position, then release the handle to lock the seat into
position. Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Manual Seat Adjuster

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat
cushion and is used to adjust the seatback position. To
adjust the seatback, lift upward on the handle, lean back
on the seatback and release the handle at the desired
position. To return the seatback, lift upward on the
handle, lean forward and release the handle at the
desired position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Recline Handle

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seatback to swing (dump) forward on manual recliner
seats. Do not stand or lean in front of the seat
while actuating the handle. The seatback may
swing forward and hit you causing injury. This
dump feature allows access to the storage bin
behind the seat. To avoid injury, place your hand
on the seatback and actuate the handle then position the seatback in the desired position.

• You can be seriously, even fatally, injured riding in
a seat with the seatback reclined. Do not ride with
the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is
no longer resting against your chest. If you ride in
this position, the shoulder harness will no longer
be restraining you. In a collision you could slide
under the seat belt and receive serious or fatal
injuries. Recline in a seat only when the vehicle is
parked.

(Continued) Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the large
button, located on the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Adjusting Head Restraint

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Head Restraints
The outboard head restraints can be adjusted. To raise the
head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To
lower the head restraint, press the large button, located
on the base of the head restraint, and push downward on
the head restraint.

NOTE: The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab only) is
fixed and cannot be adjusted.
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard
seat portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat.
The back of the center portion (20%) easily folds down to
provide an armrest/center storage compartment (if
equipped).
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard
side of the drivers seat cushion.

Adjustable Rear Head Restraints
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

NOTE: The power lumbar option is not programmable
with driver memory seats.
Your vehicle was delivered with two RKE transmitters.
One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either
memory position. The memory system can accommodate
up to two RKE transmitters, each RKE transmitter linked
to either of the two memory positions.
Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory

Memory Seat Buttons

The memory buttons 1 and 2 can be programmed to recall
the driver’s seat position, driver’s outside mirror position,
adjustable brake, accelerator pedals position and radio
station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same
positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.

NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered
button 1 or 2 are pressed, you erase the memory settings
for that button and store a new one.
1. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
the ON/RUN position.
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system 8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
to complete the memory recall before continuing to button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be
Step 3.
performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a
RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s
sideview mirror to the desired positions.
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
transmitters.
4. Adjust the power adjustable pedals (if equipped) to
the desired positions.
10. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set).
11. Select “Remote Linked to Memory” in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter “Yes”. Refer
6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
remove the key.
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
7. Press and release the S (SET) button located on the Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
driver’s door.
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory
position, using the other numbered memory button, or to
link another RKE transmitter to memory.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

driver’s mirror and the pedals stop moving. A delay of
one second will occur before another recall can be
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
selected.
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, and
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press remove the key.
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door, or the
2. Press and release MEMORY button number 1. The
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
system will recall any memory settings stored in position
memory position 1.
1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press before continuing to Step 3.
MEMORY button number 2 on the driver’s door, or the
3. Press and release the memory S (SET) button located
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
on the driver’s door.
memory position 2.
4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
button 1 on the driver’s door.
MEMORY buttons on the drivers seat during a recall (S,
1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, 5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter. To disable another RKE
Memory Position Recall

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

transmitter linked to either memory position, repeat
steps 1 through 5 for each RKE transmitter.

ignition switch. The seat will then move forward
approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is placed
into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.

NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time. • The seat will move to the position located 0.3 in
(8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting position
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
is between 0.9 to 2.67 in (23 to 68 mm) forward of the
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
switch. The seat will move forward to the memory/
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
driving position when the key is placed into the
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
ignition, and turned out of the LOCK position toward
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
the ACC/ON position.
vehicle.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature will be automatically disThere are two possible Easy Entry/Exit adjustments
abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0.9 in
available:
(23 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there
• The seat cushion will move rearward approximately is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy
2.5 in (60 mm), if the starting position of the seat is Exit/Entry.
greater than or equal to 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of the
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
rear seat stop when the key is removed from the
Entry/Exit position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled
when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering
wheel at the base of the instrument panel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Hood Release

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood
and push the safety latch lever from right to left to release
it, before raising the hood.

CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.

WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.

Safety Latch (1500 Series Shown)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

LIGHTS
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog
light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens
cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.

Headlight Switch Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Headlights
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
Automatic Headlight Position

When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

NOTE: The engine must be running before the head- delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature.

The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features (SETUP)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.

Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To
Customer-Programmable Features (SETUP)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by placing the headlight
rotary control in the parking light or headlight position
and pushing in the headlight rotary control.

Fog Light Switch

The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the bottom of the switch) is rotated to the far
right detent position, or if equipped, when the UNLOCK
button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. When a door is open and the interior lights
are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way left, to the
OFF detent, will cause all the interior lights to go out.
This is also known as the ⬙Party⬙ mode because it allows
the doors to stay open for extended periods of time
without discharging the vehicle’s battery.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control right (brighter)
or left (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
to the right until you hear a click. This feature is termed
the “Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are
required during the day.

Dimmer Control

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Cargo Light
Lights-On Reminder
The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the cargo If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
button.
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated right for
10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.

Cargo Light Switch

If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.

The cargo lights will also turn on for approximately
30 seconds when a RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
pressed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
except PARK. This provides a constant ⬙Lights ON⬙
condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights
illuminate at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the
parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) will turn OFF. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the
DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for
the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn
signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signal Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
steering column.
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show defective.
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
High/Low Beam
panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction lever. Turn the end of the handle to select
the desired wiper speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the low continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the
wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer
knob is released from this position. If the washer knob is
depressed while in the delay range, the wiper will
operate for several seconds after the washer knob is
released. It will then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected. If the washer knob is pushed while
in the off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle
approximately three times after the wash knob is released.

WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.

Mist Feature
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
time and automatically shut off.
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
rating information can be found on most washer fluid pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
containers.
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the multifunction lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the
steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering
wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in
place.

Tilt Steering Lever

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
Adjustable Pedals Switch
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
•
The
pedals
can
be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away • The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
from the driver to provide improved position with the
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Syssteering wheel.
tem is on. The following messages will be displayed
on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle InThe adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of
formation System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to
the steering column.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjust- HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
able Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
CAUTION!
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limwarm.
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
adjustable pedal’s path.
bank below the climate controls.

WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The light on the switch
will illuminate to indicate the steering
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material.. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
Vehicle” for further information.
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
WARNING!
(40 km/h).
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, right side of the steering wheel.
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.

WARNING!
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL

2 — RES +
3 — SET -

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.

To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Vary The Speed Setting
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inspeed and on level ground before pressing the SET crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
button.
increase until the button is released, then the new set
To Deactivate
speed will be established.
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without (1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
speed memory.
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

decrease until the button is released. Release the button On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains The overhead console is located on the headliner above
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on the review mirror. The overhead console contains the
following features:
moderate hills is normal.
• Courtesy/Reading Lights
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Power Sliding Rear Window Switch — If Equipped

UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, if equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing on
the corresponding lens.

Overhead Console

Courtesy/Reading Lights
Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger
compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a
door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (full right position), or when the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Front Courtesy/Reading Lights

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can provide
power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the
standard “cigar lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets
have a cap attached to the outlet indicating “12V DC”,
together with either a key symbol or a battery symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the ON or
ACC positions for the outlet to provide power. The
battery symbol indicates that the outlet is connected to
the battery, and can provide power at all times.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob
and element must be used.

Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light

NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, they will
extinguish after 15 minutes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

Power Outlet — Floor Storage Bin

The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following • Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment
— if equipped.
locations:
• Lower left and lower right of the center stack.
• Inside the top storage tray.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

Power Outlet — Upper Lid

Power Outlet — Rear Center Console

• Rear of the center console storage compartment —
Crew Cab.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The key symbol indicates that this outlet can supply
power when the key is in the ON or ACC positions.
All accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be
removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to
protect the battery against discharge.

WARNING!

Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat (Opt) or
with Console Rear
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or
with Console Front
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or
with Console Center

To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED
A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available.
For vehicles with a bench seat the cupholder tray can be
used to hold the ash receiver.

Ash Receiver and Cigar Lighter (Bench Seat)
1 — Cigar Lighter
2 — Ash Receiver

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

For vehicles equipped with a floor console the cuphold- To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
ers may be used.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the
center stack of the instrument panel, to the right of the
radio. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Power Inverter Outlet

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

The power inverter switch is located • Due to built-in overload protection, the power inverter
on the switch bank below the Climate
will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
Controls. To turn on the power outlet,
WARNING!
press the switch once. Press the switch
a second time to turn the power outlet
To avoid serious injury or death:
off.
• Do not use a three-prong adapter.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
NOTE:
• When the power inverter switch is pressed, there will • Do not touch with wet hands.
be a delay of approximately one second before the • Close the lid when not in use.
power inverter status indicator turns on. The status • If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether
the inverter is producing AC power.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CUPHOLDERS
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — (40–20–40
Seats)
The cupholders are located in the pull-out tray on the
center stack of the instrument panel.

Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor
Storage Bin
For vehicles equipped with bucket seats two cupholders
are located in the floor storage bin.

Cupholders
Front Cupholders
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

Rear Cupholder — Crew Cab
STORAGE
Crew Cab vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders Glove Box Storage
The glove box is located on the passenger side of the
located in the center armrest.
instrument panel and features both an upper (if
equipped) and lower storage area.

Crew Cab Rear Armrest Cupholder
Glove Box
1 — Upper Glove Box (If Equipped)
2 — Lower Glove Box
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To open the upper glove box push upward on the handle To open the lower glove box, pull on the handle to release
release. The glove box door will automatically open.
the latch and lower the door.

Upper Glove Box

Lower Glove Box

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

Door Storage
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas and bottle holders (drivers side only) are
located in the door trim panels.

Rear Door Storage — Crew Cab
Storage compartments are located in both the driver and
passenger door trim panels.

Rear Door Storage
Front Door Storage

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The center storage compartment is located between the
driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment
provides an armrest and contains both and upper and
lower storage area.

WARNING!
• This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or a collision. Only use the center
seating position when the armrest is fully upright.
• In a collision, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs
(4.5 kg). These items could be thrown about endangering occupants of the vehicle. Items stored
should not exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to
raise the cover. The upper storage area contains a 12 Volt
power outlet that can be used to power small electrical
devices, refer to “Electrical Power Outlets” for further
information.

Center Storage Compartment
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

Upper Storage Compartment

Lower Storage Bin

With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to
open the lower storage bin.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and passenger
front seats are pockets that can be used for storage.
Drivers Side Seatback Storage

Storage (Regular Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs
the length of the cab.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

Storage Bin

Crew Cab Storage

Storage and Seats (Crew Cab)
The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under
the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the storage compartment.
To open the storage compartments, lift upward on the
handle of the latch and open the lid.

CAUTION!
Always lift the storage compartment lids by using
the handle. Failure to lift the lids by using the handle
can result in damage to the lids.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Models)
Rear Window Defroster
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
The rear window defroster button is located on the
handles are built into the back panel of the cab, behind
climate control panel. Press this button to turn on
the seats.
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.

Grocery Bag Hooks
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

Rear Window Switch

Push the switch to the right to open the glass. Pull the
switch to the left to close the glass.

Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
The switch for the power sliding rear window is located A locking device in the center of the window helps to
on the overhead console.
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

▫ EVIC Average Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

䡵 Instrument Cluster — Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

䡵 Instrument Cluster — Premium . . . . . . . . . . . 188

▫ Vehicle Info
(Customer Information Features) . . . . . . . . . 213

䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 189

▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . 214

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

▫ Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

䡵 Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 223
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 230

䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
(Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 231
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 241
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 241
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . 246
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185

▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 252
䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Winter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

▫ Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

▫ Window Fogging And Frosting . . . . . . . . . . 266

䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones

▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

. . . . . . . 255

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1
2
3
4
5
6

—
—
—
—
—
—

Headlight Switch
Instrument Cluster
Radio
Upper Switch Bank
Upper Glove Compartment
Lower Glove Compartment

7 — 115v Power Inverter Outlet
8 — Power Outlet
9 — Lower Switch Bank
10 — Cup Holders
11 — Climate Controls
12 — Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

13
14
15
16

—
—
—
—

Transfer Case Position Switch
Ignition Switch
Hood Release
Parking Brake Release

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189

• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

1. Tachometer
The Tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per 3. Fuel Gauge
minute (RPM x 1000).
Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.

CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer at high RPM for extended periods. Engine
damage may occur.

4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera2. Turn Signal Indicators
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
when the turn signal lever is operated.
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealership for service.

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
5. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour and/or kilometers per hour (mph/km/h).
6. 4 LOW
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191

rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater required and you may experience reduced performance,
gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing.
wheels.
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a
bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indicator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.

8. 4WD Indicator
This light indicates the vehicle is in four-wheel
drive and 4LOCK. 4WD allows all four wheels
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
to receive torque from the engine simultaneously.
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
9. SVC (Service) 4WD
placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.
The SVC 4WD light monitors the electric shift
four-wheel drive system. If the SVC 4WD light
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
stays on or comes on during driving, it means
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
that the four-wheel drive system is not funcflashing when the engine is running, immediate service is tioning properly and that service is required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

12. Oil Pressure Gauge — If Equipped
The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure
when the engine is running. A continuous high or low
reading under normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Immediate service
should be obtained from an authorized dealer.

10. TOW/HAUL
The TOW HAUL button is located on the
center stack switch bank. This light will illumi- 13. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button
nate when TOW HAUL mode is selected
Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the
trip odometer display. Holding the button in resets the
trip odometer reading when in trip mode.
11. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi14. Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle Information
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
Center (EVIC) Display Area
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
Odometer Display
until the vehicle is disarmed.
The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. Regulations require that upon
transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the
purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193

the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.

Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display in the odometer:

noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
CHANgE OIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
ESCOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Stability Control Off
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas Cap Loose
HOTOIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil too Hot
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To LoCOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Engine Coolant
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Pressure Low
release the TRIP ODOMETER button.
NOTE: There is also an engine hour function. This
indicates the total number of hours the engine has been
To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odomrunning. To display the engine hours on the base cluster,
eter to be reset then push and hold the button for
perform the following: Place the ignition in the ON/
approximately two seconds until the display resets.
RUN, but do not start the engine. With the odometer
value displayed, hold the TRIP button down for a period
of six seconds. The odometer will change to trip value
first, then it will display the engine hour value. The
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

engine hours will be displayed for a period of 30 seconds cluster (Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter
until the ignition is turned OFF or the engine is started. (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information).
Some of the above warnings will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
Area located in the instrument cluster. Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped”
for further information.

A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).

noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
gASCAP
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odomIf the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel eter display area. For further information on fuses and
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
loose gascap indicator or the message “gASCAP” will Vehicle”.
display in the odometer display area. Tighten the fuel
CHANgE OIL
filler cap properly and press the TRIP button to turn off
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
the message. If the problem continues, the message will
indicator system. The CHANgE OIL message will flash
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
A loose gas cap indicator will display in the Electronic 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) for the premium the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle-based, which
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195

means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate 15. Engine Temperature Warning Light
dependent upon your personal driving style.
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
and a single chime will sound after reaching a set
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperarelease the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
ture gauge to pass H, the indicator will continuously
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
is allowed to cool.
following procedure:
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
(do not start the engine).
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
times within 10 seconds.
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indistart the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indiCenter (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information. cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
16. Shift Lever Indicator
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the 18. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that headlights are on high
automatic transmission.
beam. Push the multifunction lever forward to
NOTE: In vehicles with a 4.7L or 5.7L engine, the
switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward
highest available transmission gear is displayed in the
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range Select 19. Voltmeter — If Equipped
(ERS) feature is active. Use the +/- selector on the shift When the engine is running, the gauge indicates the
lever to activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic Transmission” electrical system voltage. The pointer should stay within
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
the normal range if the battery is charged. If the pointer
moves to either extreme left or right and remains there
17. Low Fuel Light
during normal driving, the electrical system should be
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
serviced.
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
NOTE: The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
fuel is added.
various engine temperatures. This cycling operation is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS). In this case, the light will remain on until
the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related
20. Cargo Light
to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo
applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be
light is activated by pressing the cargo light
felt during each stop.
button on the headlight switch.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
21. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
including brake fluid level and parking brake indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
application. If the brake light turns on it may when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that dropped below a specified level.
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the Anti-lock Brake System reservoir.
caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold
heater system. The number of cycles and the length of the
cycling operation is controlled by the engine control
module. Post-heat operation can run for several minutes,
and then the electrical system and voltmeter needle will
stabilize.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesdetected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
sary.
inspected by an authorized dealer.

WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

22. Oil Pressure Warning Light
Vehicles equipped with the ABS, are also equipped with
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime
system is required.
will sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. on until the vehicle is started. If the bulb does not come
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. on during starting, have the condition investigated
promptly.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi- If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information for system service.
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
23. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of soon as possible.
an onboard diagnostic (OBDII) system which
CAUTION!
monitors the emissions and engine control system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing, the light
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
will come on when the ignition is first turned on and
damage to the engine control system. It also could
remain on, as a bulb check, until the engine is started. If
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5 seconds, and remain
required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
24. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.

25. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
26. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is
not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201

27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
WARNING!
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off-road operation). If this components and cause a fire.
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this warnlight goes off.
ing light will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle InformaCAUTION!
tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further
information.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

28. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled, the seat belt reminder light will
flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.

briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.

For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi29. Charging System Light
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
This light shows the status of the electrical chargCenter (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
ing system. The light should come on when the
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.

NOTE: The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating,
eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
• Compass and Outside Temperature
• Audio Information
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Information
• Warning Messages
• Customer Programmable Features (System Setup)

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Trip Information (in Odometer line)

Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and submenus.
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus or sub-menus. Press and hold
the SELECT button for two seconds to reset
features.
BACK Button
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
previous menu or sub-menu.

EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons

Press and release the UP button to scroll
upward through the main menus (DTE, mi/
gal, System Info, Messages, Units, Setup)
and sub-menus.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Trailer Brake Connected
Displays
• Trailer Brake Disconnected
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
• Lights On
• Left front turn signal lamp out

• Keyfob Battery Low

• Right front turn signal lamp out

• Wrong Key

• Left rear turn signal lamp out

• Damaged Key

• Right rear turn signal lamp out

• Key not programmed

• Service air filter

• Key In Ignition

• Perform service

• Turn Signal On

• ESC Off

• Oil Change Due > Dealer Info

• Coolant Low

• System Setup Unavailable

• Check Trailer Brake Wiring

• Warning Object Detected

• Service Trailer Brake System

• System Setup Unavailable - Vehicle in Motion
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Service Four Wheel Drive System

• Blind spot detection unavailable

• Adjustable pedals unavail.

• Automatic High Beams on

• Cruise engaged

• Automatic High Beams off

• Adjustable pedals unavail. Veh. in reverse

• Service Keyless System

• Clean Park Assist sensors

• Clearing channels

• Front Park Assist Not available - Blinded

• Channels cleared

• Rear Park Assist Not available - Blinded

• Channels defaulted

• Low Fuel

• Channel X transmitting

• Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not in Park • Channel X training
• Service blind spot system

• Channel X trained

• Exhaust filter full – Power reduced See Dealer - • Did not train
Exhaust Filter 99% Full - - • Oil temp high Speed may be limited
• Blind spot system off
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207

• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar

EVIC Warning Lights

• Remote start aborted — Fuel low

• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.

• Remote start disabled — System fault
• Remote start active — Key to Run
• Memory 1 Profile Set
• Memory 2 Profile Set
• Memory System Unavailable — Not in Park
• Memory 1 Profile Recall
• Memory 2 Profile Recall
• Adjustable Pedals Unavail — Veh in Reverse
• Adjustable Pedals Unavail — Cruise Engaged

• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.

• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.

• Electronic Speed Control Light
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
This light will turn on when the electronic
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authospeed control is ON.
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209

• Engine Temperature Warning Light
• SERV 4WD
This light warns of an overheated engine condiThe SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap4WD system. If the SERV 4WD light stays on or
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
comes on during driving, it means that the
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
4WD system is not functioning properly and
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to that service is required.
pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
Light — If Equipped
to cool.
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to • Transmission Temperature Light
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
This light indicates that there is excessive transservice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
mission fluid temperature that might occur
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle • Loose Gascap Message
or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
light goes off.
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap icon will
CAUTION!
display in the telltale display area. Tighten the
fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperaturn off the message. If the problem continues, the
ture Indicator illuminated will eventually cause semessage will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
vere transmission damage or transmission failure.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).

WARNING!

If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.

Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Due message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211

indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the Distance To Empty (DTE)
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
your personal driving style.
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the tank level. DTE cannot be reset.
BACK button. To reset the oil change indicator system
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the following steps.
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (Do not
When the DTE value is less than 10 miles (16 km)
start the engine)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
within 10 seconds.
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

EVIC Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.

The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
• Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
• Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.

Trip Functions
Press and release the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER
• Elapsed Time
button until one of the following Trip Functions display
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
in the EVIC odometer line:
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
• Trip A
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
Press the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER button to
cycle through all the Trip Computer functions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213

To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the ODOMETER/TRIP
ODOMETER button once to clear the resettable function
being displayed.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
available information displays, then press SELECT to
display any one of the following choices.
• Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.

• Trailer Brake — If Equipped
Displays trailer brake output power and trailer brake
status indicator.
• Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Units
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. The
EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) can
be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the
preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.

• Trans Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Compass / Temperature Display
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass
readings and the outside temperature.
NOTE:
• The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be
driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect
the displayed temperature; therefore, temperature
readings are not updated when the vehicle is not
moving.
• During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped with
outside temperature display, the display may show
higher temperatures than the outside ambient temperature. The higher displayed temperature is due to
blocked or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient

temperature sensor caused by the snowplow. In addition, on vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control (ATC), it is suggested that the interior
cabin temperature be manually controlled should the
system not perform as desired while in automatic
mode. Both the outside temperature display and ATC
operation will return to normal when the snowplow is
removed.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215

NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and 4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
an environment free from large metallic objects such as calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, EVIC.
etc.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
Manual Compass Calibration
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator indicator turns off. The compass will now function
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the normally.
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
then press the SELECT button.
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is differences, and provide the most accurate compass
displayed in the EVIC then press and release the SELECT heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
button.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.

2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
then press the SELECT button.
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance”
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the SELECT
button. The last variance zone number displays in the
EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
5. Press and release the BACK button to exit.

Compass Variance Map

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.

Customer-Programmable Features (System
Setup)
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE, is followed in three seconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until System route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destination is reached. To make your selection, press and release
Setup displays in the EVIC.
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
following choices.
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Select Language
When in this display you may select one of five lanAuto Unlock Doors
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
through the language choices. Press the SELECT button
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français),
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
Italian (Italiano), German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Nederfeature showing the system has been activated, or the
lands). Then, as you continue, the information will discheck-mark is removed showing the system has been
play in the selected language.
deactivated.
Nav–Turn By Turn
Remote Unlock Sequence
When this feature is selected, the navigation system
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive
door will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected,
you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button
twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All Doors
1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the
first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st
Press” appears.
RKE Linked To Memory
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror,
pedals, and radio settings will return to the memory set
position when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. If this feature is not
selected then the memory seat, mirror, and radio settings
can only return to the memory set position using the seat
mounted switch. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears

next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated.
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
seat features will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are
above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on
when remote start is activated. These features will stay on
through the duration of remote start or until the key is
turned to RUN. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219

Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
This feature may be selected with or without the Flash
Lamps with Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.

Flash Lamps With Lock
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
then press and release the SELECT button until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
has been selected.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Headlamps With Wipers
When this feature is selected and the HEADLIGHT
switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn
on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned
on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

Tilt Mirror In Reverse — If Equipped
When this feature is selected and the shift lever is placed
in reverse gear, the side mirrors tilt downward to allow
the driver to see into the previous blind spot and avoid
objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle. To
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
Key-Off Power Delay
feature showing the system has been activated or the
When this feature is selected, the power window
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
deactivated.
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221

and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.

Trailer Brake Type
When this feature is selected, the Trailer Brake Type can
be changed between “Light Electric” and “Heavy Electric”. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the
preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
Refer to “Integrated Trailer Brake Module” in “Starting
And Operating.”
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED

MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side side of the radio faceplate.
of the unit’s faceplate.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Media Center 130 (RES)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
position to operate the radio.
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
TIME Button
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
and radio frequency.
time to turn off the radio.
Clock Setting Procedure
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
SCROLL control knob.
volume, and to the left decreases it.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
set at the same volume level as last played.
will begin to blink.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
knob to save time change.
mid-range tones.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
RW/FF
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
treble tones.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
AM or FM frequencies.
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
AM/FM Button
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to pressing the pushbutton twice.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
button number will display.
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button Buttons 1 - 6
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
NOTE:
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
position to operate the radio.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play

• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.

Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within RW/FF
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
button works in a similar manner.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
AM/FM Button
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SEEK Button
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
change of pace.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Press this button to change the display from a large CD Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Notes on Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
file recording media and formats are limited. When
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions.
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types)
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229

Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.

MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3

Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
to load than non-multisession discs
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
increase with more files and folders
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a OFF).
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231

MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio.
side of the radio faceplate.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)

SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.

Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea- available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
tures Of Your Vehicle”.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
TIME Button
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under- and radio frequency.
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Clock Setting Procedure
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ INFO Button
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
will begin to blink.
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
knob to save time change.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. AM or FM frequencies.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TUNE Control
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
procedure, starting at Step 2.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.

MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be sePush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Music Type information.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
treble tones.
format types:
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
Program Type
16-Digit Character Display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
No program type or
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
None
undefined
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
Classical
Classicl
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Classic Rock
Cls Rock
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
College
College
the front and rear speakers.
Country
Country
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Foreign Language
Language
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235

Program Type
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk

16-Digit Character Display
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk

Program Type
Top 40
Weather

16-Digit Character Display
Top 40
Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237

CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.

238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within RW/FF
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
works in a similar manner.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
AM/FM Button
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SEEK Button
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
change of pace.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanPress this button to change the display from a large CD dom Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239

Notes On Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
file recording media and formats are limited. When
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions.
display the file name and folder name and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types)
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3

Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241

LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
by the following:
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
before writing to the disc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).

Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilRadio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chilNOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
limited coverage in Alaska.
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
System Activation
down.
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243

radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.

using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.

Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
Number (ESN/SID)
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
Please have the following information available when mode.
calling:
Satellite Antenna
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
Number (ESN/SID).
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
ESN/SID Access
on or above the antenna.
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Reception Quality
SEEK Buttons
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
following reasons:
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
structure or under a physical obstacle.
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the without stopping until you release it.
form of short audio mutes.
SCAN Button
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before concause intermittent reception.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
button a second time.
cause signal blockage.
INFO Button
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa(Satellite) Mode
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
ACC position to operate the radio.
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the channel with the same selected Music Type name.
direction of the arrows.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
SETUP Button
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type following items:
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
seconds will allow the program format type to be senumber is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
lected.
Sirius subscription.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
type.
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.

Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
iPod威/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
iPod威/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
an option with these radios.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compartbutton number will display.
ment.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247

iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod威 or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.

USB Connector Port

NOTE: The glove compartment will have a position
Connecting The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
where the iPod威 or consumer electronic audio device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external
cable can be routed through without damaging the cable
USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is
when closing the lid. This allows routing of the cable
located in the glove compartment.
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

not available in the glove compartment, route the cable Using This Feature
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
USB port:
lid to close without damaging the cable.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to • The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or
etc.) information on the radio display.
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
pressing radio switches, as described below.
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
audio device)
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level. Controlling The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249

control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.

• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
the current track.

Play Mode
When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play • Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
USB device and display data:
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
seconds.
previous track.
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
Track⬙.
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
press the VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.

device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.

• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.

List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.

• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 device scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
each track in the current list and then forward to the
device or external USB device.
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockSCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previthe track detail on the radio display. Once the track
ous and next tracks.
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251

fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticeable.

• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.

• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward
(counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.

• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.

• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or
external USB device.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts

• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.

WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.

Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect™ phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Streaming Audio”.
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
Selecting Different Audio Device
1. Press PHONE button to begin.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253

2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.
access the switches.
Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
music on your cellular phone.
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
previous track music on your cellular phone.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
current song that is playing will display info.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a The button located in the center of the left hand control
pushbutton in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the programmed in the radio pre-set pushbuttons.
switch will decrease the volume.
CD Player
The button located in the center of the right hand control Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
will switch modes to Radio, CD or other valid audio track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
source.
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
after the current track begins to play.
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in. If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
each mode.
CDs on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This button
Radio Operation
does not function for all other radios.
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particuCD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
precautions:
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
NOTE: During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped
with outside temperature display, the display may show
higher temperatures than the outside ambient temperature. The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked
or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient temperature sensor caused by the snowplow. In addition, on
vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC), it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature
be manually controlled should the system not perform as
desired while in automatic mode. Both the outside temperature display and ATC operation will return to normal when the snowplow is removed.

Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
be set to obtain desired interior conditions.

1 – Front Blower
2 – Temperature Control
3 – MODE Control

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

4 – DEFROST Mode
5 – Air Conditioning (A/C)
6 – RECIRCULATION Control

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257

Front Blower Control
There are four blower speeds. Use this
control to regulate the amount of air
forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the OFF position.

temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures.

NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the OFF position. Mode Control (Air Direction)
Mode control allows you to choose
Temperature Control
from several patterns of air distribuUse this control to regulate the temtion. You can select either a primary
perature of the air inside the passenger
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
compartment. Rotating the knob couna blend of two of these modes. The
terclockwise, from top center into the
closer the control is to a particular
blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Panel Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
Bi-Level Mode
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
with
maximum
blower and warm temperature settings
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
for
best
windshield
and side window defrosting.
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the
small amount through the defrost and side window A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to
help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use
demist outlets.
these modes only when necessary.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259

Recirculation Control
Press this button to choose between
outside air intake or recirculation of
the air inside the vehicle. A LED will
illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use the Recirculation
mode to temporarily block out any
outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to
cool the interior rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot
or humid weather.

• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the outside air position.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection by pressing the A/C
button.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control
airflow.

NOTE:
• If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the
system is in Mix or Defrost mode the Recirculation NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
LED indicator will flash three times and then turn off instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
seat passengers.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Economy Mode
MAX A/C
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired
temperature.

For maximum cooling, when MAX
A/C is selected the A/C is turned on
automatically and the air is recirculated.

Air Conditioning Operation
Push this button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuNOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C
minate when the A/C system is
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C
engaged.
button is pushed.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
• The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows
both driver and front passenger seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261

• When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode
operation, Auto blower operation is set by using rotary
knobs on the control unit and a comfort temperature
setting by using the temperature up and down buttons.
• The system provides set-and-forget operation for optimum comfort and convenience.

• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
• SYNC feature links the temperature controls, the passenger side temperature becomes the same as the
temperature selected by the driver.
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior
comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Blower Control
Left Temperature Up
SYNC Indicator
Left Temperature Indicator
Right Temperature Indicator
DELAY Indicator
Right Temperature Up
MODE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

9 - DEFROST
10 - Right Temperature Down
11 - A/C
12 - A/C Indicator
13 - SYNC Temperature Button
14 - Left Temperature Down
15 - RECIRCULATE

262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
1. Position the MODE control knob to the Auto position
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
2. Position the BLOWER control knob in the Auto posicomfort as quickly as possible.
tion on the ATC Panel.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
3. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front
Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features
passenger temperature buttons. Once the desired tem(SETUP)” in this section of the manual.
perature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
4. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the ATC
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to display until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode and
function automatically.
DELAY will no longer be illuminated in the display. The
Automatic Operation

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263

blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
selected, or by adjusting the blower control knob and adjusting the blower control knob. The fan will now
operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are
setting the fan to any fixed speed.
selected. This allows the front occupants to control the
Manual Operation
volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
This system offers a full complement of manual override
Auto mode.
features.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
by selecting one of the following positions.
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
the temperature doors will continue to operate automati- Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
cally.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
There are six fixed blower speeds. Use
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets
this control to regulate the amount of
and outboard outlets can be rotated to regulate or shut off
air forced through the system in any
the airflow from these outlets.
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control Bi-Level Mode
clockwise from the OFF position.
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost outlets.
Blower Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the air
air is directed through the defrost and side window
conditioning system. When in A/C mode and the
demister outlets.
ATC is set to a cool temperature, dehumidified air flows
Mix Mode
through the air outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
the A/C button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
display and deactivate the A/C system.
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable
NOTE:
while keeping the windshield clear.
• If the system is in Mix, Bi-Level or Defrost Mode, the
Defrost Mode
A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall
Air comes from the windshield and side window
remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
blower and temperature settings for best windshield and • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
side window defrosting.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265

Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The
recirculation LED will illuminate on the blower control
knob when this button is selected. Push the button a
second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and
allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Floor/Defrost Mix and
Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these
modes are selected.

Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in
fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.

Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake
is clear of ice, slush and snow.

Window Fogging and Frosting
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost
on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation
mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may
occur.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267

Operating Tips

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 278

▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

▫ Six–Speed Automatic Transmission
(5.7L Engine) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 275
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped . . 288
▫ Manually Shifted Transfer Case – If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Transfer Case Position Indicator Light . . . . . . 291

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

270 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Four-Position Switch) – If Equipped . . . . . . . 292
▫ Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
䡵 Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . 307
䡵 Tire Safety Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 314
䡵 Tires — General Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 271

▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 325

䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 326

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 336

▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

䡵 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Dual Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 341
䡵 Vehicle Loading

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

272 STARTING AND OPERATING

䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

▫ Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

▫ General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 348 䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive
䡵 Snowplow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Before Plowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Snowplow Prep Package Model
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

. . . . 364
. . . . 365
. . . . 365
. . . . 366

▫ Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 273

STARTING PROCEDURES
Normal Starting
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key fob to the START position and release
The starter should not be operated for more than 15when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such
10 seconds, turn the key fob to the OFF position, wait five
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in the vehicle. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.

Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting into any
driving range.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
pressed to shift out of PARK.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

274 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition switch
briefly to the START position and release it. The starter
motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage when the engine is running.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.

CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.

WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 275

WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key
fob is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the
accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release
the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is
running smoothly.

After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled and will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
3500 Models — 5.7L Engine Only
The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille
by the right front tow hook.

It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered
strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not
in use for the winter months. During winter months,
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
the c-clip.
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should
be repeated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

276 STARTING AND OPERATING

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.

WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 277

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the key fob. Once the key fob is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
unattended children inside a vehicle.

• Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the shift lever. Do not leave the key
fob in the vehicle. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

278 STARTING AND OPERATING

Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position unless the brakes are applied. To move
the shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition
switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine
running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Six–Speed Automatic Transmission
(5.7L Engine) — If Equipped
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. The

shift lever is mounted on the right side of the steering
column. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift
lever out of the PARK position (refer to “Brake/
Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To
drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to
the DRIVE position. Pull the shift lever toward you when
shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of
PARK.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 279

The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select
(ERS)” in this section). Pressing the ERS (-/+) switches on
the shift lever while in the DRIVE position will select the
highest available transmission gear, and will display that
gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this
range.

When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade

WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

(Continued)

280 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever clockwise without first pulling it toward you after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the key fob. Once the key fob is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
unattended children inside a vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key
fob in the vehicle. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 281

• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.

CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.

• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle rearward. Use this
range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
The following indicators should be used to ensure that started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position: transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
• When shifting into PARK, pull the shift lever toward
you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it
stops.
• Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated
in the PARK gate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

282 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.

DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth and
sixth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) feature (refer to “Electronic Range Select
(ERS)” in this section) to select a lower gear range. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 283

If the transmission operating temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until
the transmission cools down.
NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep
grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a
significant additional heat load on the cooling system.
Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible
gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL
(when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this
excess heat generation.

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the
torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or
below), operation may briefly be limited to first and
direct gears only. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

284 STARTING AND OPERATING

to operate. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomdriven to an authorized dealer for service without dam- mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
aging the transmission.
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
recur.
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position. driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
5. Restart the engine.
second and first gear normally.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
operation.
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 285

switch will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the ERS (+)
the instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as the top switch until “D” is once again displayed in the shift lever
available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping ERS (-) or (+) position indicator in the instrument cluster.
will change the top available gear.

WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
Screen Display
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed

Column Shift Lever

1
1

2
1-2

3
1-3

4
1-4

5
1-5

6 D
1-6 1-6

NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
ERS (-) switch down. The transmission will shift to the
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

286 STARTING AND OPERATING

Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fifth and sixth gears). The transmission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if
the following conditions are present:
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,

HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce
the potential for transmission overheating or failure due
to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission will automatically downshift (for engine braking) during steady braking maneuvers.

• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature,
• the engine coolant (antifreeze) has reached an adequate temperature,
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
• the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to select TOW/
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

TOW/HAUL Switch

STARTING AND OPERATING 287

The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode
has been activated. Pressing the switch a second time
restores normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is
desired, the switch must be pressed each time the engine
is started.

transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].
Because sixth gear is disabled, and engine speed is
higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not
shifting properly when cold. This is normal. Using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.

Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati- • If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transcally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
different feeling or response during normal operation in
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
cause damage to the transmission. The torque conNOTE:
verter will refill within five seconds after starting the
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the
engine.
transmission will not shift to sixth gear, until the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

288 STARTING AND OPERATING

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a
manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted
transfer case. Refer to the operating instructions for your
transfer case, located in this section for further information.
Manually Shifted Transfer Case – If Equipped
The transfer case provides four mode positions.
• Two-wheel drive high range (2H)
• Four-wheel drive high range (4H)
• Neutral (N)
• Four-wheel drive low range (4L)
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions such
as dry, hard surfaced roads.

When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L
positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simply
moving the shift lever to the desired positions. The 4H
and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry,
hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to the driveline components.
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is
in four-wheel drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are locked together. This light will illuminate when
the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L
position. There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL
positions.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 289

When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions
at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
can cause damage to the drivetrain.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and
rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are
spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.

NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.

WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

290 STARTING AND OPERATING

For additional information on the appropriate use of each 4L
transfer case mode position, see the information below: Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
2H
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
4H
Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted Transfer
Four-Wheel Drive High Range - This range locks the
Case
front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional 2H ⇔ 4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion,
N
shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the
Neutral - This range disengages the front and rear
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
disengage faster if you momentarily release the acceleratowing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
tor pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
force when shifting the transfer case lever.
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 291

2H or 4H ⇔ 4L
• Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due
the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the vehicle is
to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned.
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in
alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred
transfer case NEUTRAL.
method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
NOTE:
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to
• Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles
5 km/h).
equipped with an automatic transmission may require
shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while • Do not attempt to shift into or from 4L while the
transmission is in gear.
completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL, hold foot on brake, and
Transfer Case Position Indicator Light
turn the engine OFF. Make shift to the desired mode.
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front
axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

292 STARTING AND OPERATING

Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Four-Position Switch) – If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.

This electronically shifted transfer case provides four
mode positions:
• Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
• Four-wheel drive lock range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced
roads.

Transfer Case Switch (Four-Position)

When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock
the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 293

desired position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for specific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD
LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW
positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected
by pressing the recessed button located on the lower left
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer case
NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing
only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.

Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate
the current and desired transfer case selection. When you
select a different transfer case position, the indicator
lights will do the following:
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

294 STARTING AND OPERATING

2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.

WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal
injury.

3. The transfer case will not shift.

NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require- NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ in this section for front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause
further information.
damage to driveline components.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it
means that the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 295

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends For additional information on the appropriate use of each
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each transfer case mode position, see the information below:
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
2WD
drivetrain.
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
4WD LOCK
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Four-Wheel Drive Lock Range - This range locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
WARNING!
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides
You or others could be injured if you leave the additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
4WD LOW
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range provides low
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
speed four-wheel drive. It locks the front and rear
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery
brake should always be applied when the driver is
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
not in the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

296 STARTING AND OPERATING

N
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
Neutral - This range disengages both the front and rear
position have been met, the current position indicator
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
Towing” in Starting and Operating” for further
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
information.
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
Shifting Procedure
2WD⇔ 4WD LOCK
NOTE:
Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in
shift. The position indicator light for the previous
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
position will remain ON and the newly selected posiyou momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turntion indicator light will continue to flash until all the
ing the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
requirements for the selected position have been met.
ignition switch must be in the ON position with the
To retry a shift: return the control knob back to the
engine either running or off. This shift cannot be comoriginal position, make certain all shift requirements
pleted if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.
have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift
again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 297

NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow
shifts between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear
wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the
selected position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this time,
reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete
the shift.

2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure

2WD or 4WD LOCK⇔ 4WD LOW

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position, and the
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
engine either OFF or running, shift the transmission into
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
NEUTRAL.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use
position.
either of the following procedures:
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
Preferred Procedure
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

298 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the
shift, then the desired position indicator light will flash
continuously while the original position indicator light
is ON, until all requirements have been met.

surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of the
driving effort to the rear wheel having the better traction.

LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when
there is a difference between the traction characteristics of
the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs similarly to a conventional differential. On slippery

On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose
control of the vehicle.

The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator
will supply maximum traction. When starting with only
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights momentary application of the parking brake may be
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON necessary to gain maximum traction.
position, the shift will not take place and no position
WARNING!
indicator lights will be on or flashing.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 299

Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a
turn.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the rear (driving) wheels.

WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

300 STARTING AND OPERATING

2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Flowing/Rising Water
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.

WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 301

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.

• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

302 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.

POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 303

system. This noise should be considered normal, and it checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticidoes not in any way damage the steering system.
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authoWARNING!
rized dealer.
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

304 STARTING AND OPERATING

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied, the engine is off and the key fob is
removed from the ignition switch. Also, be certain to
leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or manual
transmission in REVERSE or first gear.
Parking Brake Release
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
When
the
parking
brake is applied with the ignition
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
switch
ON,
the
“Brake
Warning Light” in the instrument
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
cluster
will
illuminate.
release the parking brake, pull the parking brake release
handle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 305

NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key fob in the vehicle. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in
REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause
the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

306 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the
brakes will still function. However, you will experience a
substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.

If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
braking capability, the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This
will be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
activation of the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS
Warning Light” (if equipped) during brake use.
The brake system power assist is provided by a hydroboost unit which shares fluid with the power steering
system. You may experience some clicking or hissing
noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking
conditions.
NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be
higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches
operating temperature.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 307

Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System

WARNING!
The Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System contains
sophisticated electronic equipment. It may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock
braking capability. Installation of such equipment
should be performed by qualified professionals.

The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation. This is
normal.
The ABS conducts a low-speed selftest at about 10 mph
(16 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake
while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal
movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice
and snow. This is normal.

When you are in a severe braking condition involving
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
The Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is dethe vehicle comes to a complete stop. This is the result of
signed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control
the system reverting to the base brake system and is
under adverse braking conditions. The system operates
normal.
with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure
to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
slippery surfaces.
These occurrences are normal, and indicate that the
system is functioning.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

308 STARTING AND OPERATING

ABS Warning Light
The ABS includes an amber warning light. When the light
is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system
reverts to standard, non-anti-lock brakes.

WARNING!
• Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.

WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 309

NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings

• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description

• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades

• Temporary spare tires are spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

310 STARTING AND OPERATING

compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Exstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 311

EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

312 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 313

Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Maximum Inflation Pressure

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard

Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

314 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire And Loading Information Placard

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.

Tire and Loading Information Placard

Tire Placard Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 315

This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.

axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

316 STARTING AND OPERATING

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- NOTE:
• The following table shows examples on how to calcusengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs • For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
[295 kg]).
(392 kg).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 317

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

318 STARTING AND OPERATING

Safety

WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 319

WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.

Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear Information” section of this manual.
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
consumption.
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

320 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 321

Tire Inflation Pressure – 4500/5500 With Steel
Carcass Ply Tires
This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewall. As
such, they cannot be treated like normal light truck tires.
Adjusting tire pressure must be performed by personnel
trained, supervised and equipped accordingly.

Inflation Pressure Adjustment When Mounted To
Vehicle
During procedures when adding tire inflation pressure,
the technician or individual must utilize a remote inflation device, and ensure that all persons are clear of the
trajectory area.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

322 STARTING AND OPERATING

4500/5500 Tire Inflation
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 323

When adjusting inflation pressure to a tire and wheel Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
assembly mounted on a vehicle, use a Remote Mount The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condiAutomatic Inflation Kit or see your authorized dealer.
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
NOTE: Never attempt to re-inflate a tire and wheel
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
assembly which has been run flat or is extremely underimportant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
inflated without first removing the tire from the wheel
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operaassembly for inspection.
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
Personnel trained, supervised, and equipped according dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
to Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administra- and cold tire inflation pressures.
tion (OSHA) should perform this work.
Inflation Pressure Adjustment When Not Mounted to
Vehicle
When adjusting inflation pressure to a tire and wheel
assembly not mounted on a vehicle, use a Remote Mount
Automatic Inflation Kit and a Tire Inflation Cage or see
your authorized dealer.

WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

324 STARTING AND OPERATING

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Always use radial ply
tires in sets of four (or six, in case of trucks with dual
rear wheels). Never combine them with other types
of tires.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.

If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempoCuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
with one of the following types of non-matching temporary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 325

CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time

WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

326 STARTING AND OPERATING

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the first opportunity.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
WARNING!
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Inspare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
first opportunity.
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the result in loss of vehicle control.
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 327

Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.

Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.

1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

328 STARTING AND OPERATING

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.

WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years,
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.

Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
factors including, but not limited to:
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Driving style
Replacement Tires
• Tire pressure
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
• Distance driven
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 329

Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

(Continued)

330 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control resulting in
serious injury or death.

SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION
— IF EQUIPPED
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passengers [150 lbs (68 kg) each] plus 200 lbs (91 kg) of cargo.
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle
will be found on the face of the driver’s door.
TIRE CHAINS
Use “Class U” chains or other traction aids that meet SAE
Type “U” specifications.
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle,
as recommended by the chain manufacturer.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains,
observe the following precautions:

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 331

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Because of limited chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious vehicle damage. Stop
the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
suggest chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
• Install chains as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about 1/2 mi (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2
vehicles.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.

• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer
if different than the speed recommended by the
manufacturer.

(Continued)

These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of your
4X2 trucks.
NOTE:
• The use of class “U” chains is permitted on the front
and rear of 4X4 vehicles, trucks with dual rear wheels
and LT235/80R17 tires.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

332 STARTING AND OPERATING

• On 4X2 vehicles, class “U” snow chains are permitted
on the rear wheels only of vehicles equipped with
LT245/70R17, LT265/70R17, and LT235/80R17 size
tires.

SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S designation on the tire sidewall.

• On 4X4 Single Rear Wheel (SRW) vehicles, class “U” If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
snow chains are permitted on the rear wheels only on type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
vehicles equipped with LT265/70R17.
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.

CAUTION!
Do not use tire chains on the 4X2 front wheels of
SRW (Single Rear Wheels) equipped with LT245/
70R17, LT265/70R17 tires or 4X4 front tires of vehicles
equipped with LT265/70R17 tires. There may not be
adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking
structural or body damage to your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 333

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Tire Rotation

334 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: On Canadian vehicles only, if your vehicle is
equipped with All-Season type tires on the front and
On/Off Road type tires mounted on the rear, do not use
a front to back rotation pattern. Instead, rotate your tires
side to side at the recommended intervals.

The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set.
To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all
four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.

CAUTION!

Dual Rear Wheels

4500/5500 Dual Rear Tires have only one approved
direction of rotation. This is to accommodate the
asymmetrical design (tread pattern) of the On/Off
road tire.
(Continued)

Tire Rotation
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 335

CAUTION! (Continued)
• When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to
be remounted on the rim or installed at a different
location to maintain the correct placement of the
tire on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position
on the vehicle. For example, if the spare is used to
replace an outer rear tire it will have to be remounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished
inward. That way the tread design of asymmetrical
tires will maintain proper position.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
The 5.7L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane

for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline
is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit
over regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance
and durability for your vehicle. We recommend the use
of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they
are available.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

336 STARTING AND OPERATING

Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

CAUTION!
Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or E-85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.

The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoProblems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
lines. Properly-blended reformulated gasolines will proE-85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
fuel system components.
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Methanol.
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxyE-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. OxygenNon-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containates are required in some areas of the country during the
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
Winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 337

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: exposure to E-85 fuel.
• operate in a lean mode

MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• poor engine performance
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
• poor cold start and cold drivability
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
E-85 perform the following:
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
or not the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more
• change the engine oil and oil filter
important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada,
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the because MMT can be used at levels higher than those
engine controller memory
allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in
Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

338 STARTING AND OPERATING

Materials Added To Fuel
All gasolines sold in the United States are required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance, damage the emission control system.

CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• When pulling a heavy load or driving a fullyloaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the
temperature is high, use a premium unleaded fuel
to help prevent spark knock. If spark knock persists, lighten the load, or engine piston damage
may result.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 339

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives which are now being
sold as octane enhancers is not recommended.
Many of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

340 STARTING AND OPERATING

ADDING FUEL

WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.

CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a
poorly-fitted aftermarket cap can cause the MIL
(Malfunction Indicator Light) to illuminate due to
fuel vapors escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the
fuel tank is full.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 341

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running. This is in violation of most state and
federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to
turn on.

A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap 1/4 turn until you hear one
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
click. This is an indication that the cap is properly
Refer
to
“Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
tightened.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inIf the gas cap is not tightened properly, the Malfunction formation. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
Indicator Light will come on, Be sure the gas cap is the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

342 STARTING AND OPERATING

VEHICLE LOADING

rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin- Payload
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
(VIN).
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
components sometimes specified by purchasers for inThe GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehiincluding driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. cle’s GVWR.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 343

Tire Size
The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.

Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.

Rim Size
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commerThis is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
listed.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
Inflation Pressure
properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
Curb Weight
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

344 STARTING AND OPERATING

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way and recommendations in this manual concerning vethe brakes operate.
hicles used for trailer towing.

CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.

Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 345

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.

WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.

NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg) Tongue Weight (TW)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or Frontal Area
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further maximum width of the front of a trailer.
information.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

346 STARTING AND OPERATING

the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric- safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
Weight-Carrying Hitch
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
requirements.
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumWARNING!
sized trailers.
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
Weight-Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability and braking
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverperformance and could result in a collision.
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
•
Weight distributing systems may not be compatfor heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
ible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recin accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it proreational
Vehicle
dealer
for
additional
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
information.
steering and brake control, thereby enhancing towing
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 347

Fifth-Wheel Hitch
The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a
coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle
in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel
trailer with a coupling king pin.
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm
which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup
truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted
over the rear axle in the truck bed.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Heavy Duty
Fifth Wheel/
Greater than 10,000 lbs
Gooseneck
(4540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

348 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
CHASSIS CAB 3500
5.7L HEMI威 V8 5-Speed Automatic Transmission
6.7L Cummins威 Turbo Diesel I-6 6-Speed Manual
Transmission
6.7L Cummins威 Turbo Diesel I-6 6-Speed Automatic
Transmission

ST/SLT/Laramie
Towing: 10,850 lbs (4921 kg) - max
Payload: 6,520 lbs (2957 kg) - max
Towing: 18,750 lbs (8505 kg) - max
Payload: 5,910 lbs (2681 kg) - max
Towing: 18,700 lbs (8482 kg) - max
Payload: 5,850 lbs (2653 kg) - max

CHASSIS CAB 4500
6.7L Cummins威 Turbo Diesel I-6 6-Speed Manual
Transmission
6.7L Cummins威 Turbo Diesel I-6 6-Speed AISIN Automatic Transmission

ST/SLT/Laramie
Towing: 18,350 lbs (8323 kg) - max
Payload: 8,880 lbs (4028 kg) - max
Towing: 18,300 lbs (8301 kg) - max
Payload: 8,830 lbs (4005 kg) - max

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 349

CHASSIS CAB 5500
6.7L Cummins威 Turbo Diesel I-6 6-Speed Manual
Transmission
6.7L Cummins威 Turbo Diesel I-6 6-Speed AISIN
Automatic Transmission

ST/SLT/Laramie
Towing: 18,300 lbs (8301 kg) - max
Payload: 11,820 lbs (5361 kg) - max
Towing: 18,250 lbs (8278 kg) - max
Payload: 11,770 lbs (5339 kg) - max

NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi- Trailer And Tongue Weight
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the GTW
addresses:
on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
• http://www.ramtrucks.com.
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
• http://www.ramtruck.ca (Canada).
severely side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in
front is the cause of many trailer collisions.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

350 STARTING AND OPERATING

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on • The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
your trailer hitch.
put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 351

Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:

CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

352 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR

2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).

(Continued)

Towing Requirements – Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer with less than the full
size spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 353

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
required when towing a trailer with electronically
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
proper inspection procedure.
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
GVWR and GAWR limits.

CAUTION!

Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

354 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic
(EOH) trailer brakes.

NOTE: This module has been designed and verified
with electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydraulic systems. Some previous EOH systems may not be
compatible with ITBM.

1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

GAIN/Brake Output Power Display
Manual Brake Control Lever
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
GAIN Adjustment Buttons

STARTING AND OPERATING 355

The user interface consists of the following:
GAIN/ Brake Output Power Display
Shows the current GAIN setting.

lever is activated while the brake is also applied, the
greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to
the trailer brakes.

The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come on
This display may also be used to display diagnostic
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are
information, if needed.
applied.
• SC — Short Circuit to Ground
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.
• Sb — Short to Battery
• CF — Controller Fault – If this message appears on the If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is
display, see your authorized dealer.
turned on, pressing the GAIN adjustment button or
sliding the manual brake control lever will display the
When the vehicle brakes are applied, the display will no
GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status
longer show GAIN and will change to the output to the
Indicator Light” will not be displayed.
trailer brakes.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated
Manual Brake Control Lever
Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the “Trailer Brake Status
Slide the manual brake control lever to the right to
Indicator Light” will flash.
activate power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent
of the tow vehicle’s brakes. If the manual brake control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

356 STARTING AND OPERATING

GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pressing these buttons will adjust the brake control
power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The
GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or
decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control
for the specific towing condition and should be changed
as towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions
and weather.

1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
condition, functioning normally, and properly adjusted.
See your trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged
in, the trailer connected message should appear in the
EVIC (if the connection is not recognized by the ITBM,
braking functions will not be available), the GAIN setting
will illuminate and the correct type of trailer must be
selected from the EVIC options.

Adjusting GAIN
NOTE: This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 357

4. Press the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel 5. Press the SELECT button and then press the UP or
until System Setup appears on the screen.
DOWN buttons until Trailer Brake Type appears on the
screen.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

358 STARTING AND OPERATING

6. Press the SELECT button and then press the UP or 8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
appears on the screen.
squeeze the manual brake control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn
freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat Steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point
just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier
trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even
with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
EVIC Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Display messages,
along with a single chime, will be displayed when a
7. Use the GAIN adjustment (+/-) buttons to increase or
malfunction is determined in the trailer connection,
decrease the GAIN setting to the desired starting point. A
trailer brake control, or on the trailer. Refer to “Electronic
GAIN setting of 5 is a good starting point.
Vehicle Information Center” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 359

CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss
of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping distance or trailer instability which could result
in damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.

WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss
of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping distance or trailer instability which could result
in personal injury.

NOTE:
• An aftermarket controller may be available for use
with air trailer brake systems and other systems not
compatible with ITBM. To determine the type of
brakes on your trailer and the availability of controllers, check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
• Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may
cause damage to the electrical system and electronic
modules of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer if
an aftermarket module is to be installed.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

360 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Any work done to the vehicle’s electrical system or
wiring should be performed by a qualified automotive technician. If done improperly it may cause
damage to the electrical system wiring and could
result in serious or fatal injury.

NOTE: Using “TOW/HAUL” mode or a lower gear
range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating
conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build
up. This action will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you regularly tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The “DRIVE” range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, select
“TOW/HAUL” mode or select a lower gear using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature.

Tow/Haul
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, turn the “TOW/HAUL” feature ON when driving in
hilly areas, or select a lower gear range (using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature) on more severe
grades.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 361

Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.

− When using the speed control, if you experience speed SNOWPLOW
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory
installed option. These packages include components
you can get back to cruising speed.
necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly
maximize fuel efficiency.
recommended that the owner/installer obtain and follow
Cooling System
the recommendations contained within the current
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- Dodge Body Builders Guide. See your authorized dealer,
heating, take the following actions:
installer or snowplow manufacturer for this information.
There are unique electrical systems that must be con− City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans- nected to properly assure operator safety and prevent
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed. overloading vehicle systems.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

362 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described earlier in this manual

CAUTION!
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exterior lamps are not properly installed.
Before Plowing

• Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear.
The cutting edge should be 1/4 to 1/2 in (6 cm to
1.2 cm) above ground in snow plowing position.
• Check that snowplow lighting is connected and functioning properly.
Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability
For Information about snowplow applications visit
www.dodge.com or refer to the current Dodge Body
Builders Guide.
1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck
should not exceed two.

2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear
• Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid
GAWR should never be exceeded.
level.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of
• Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tightoptions or passengers, etc.
ness.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 363

The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow
system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers,
options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR)
ratings. These weights are specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label on the driver’s side door
opening.

Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equipment following the recommendations provided by the
specific snowplow manufacturer.

Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the
engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures.
NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting pas- Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade
completely and position it as low as road or surface
sengers.
conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specificaoperator should always maintain a safe stopping distance
tions at the factory without consideration for the weight
and allow adequate passing clearance.
of the plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and reset
if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow Operating Tips
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h)
season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear.
should be maximum operating speed. The operator
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is
should be familiar with the area and surface to be
parked.
cleaned. Reduce speed and use extreme caution when
plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

364 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped
with outside temperature display, the display may show
higher temperatures than the outside ambient temperature. The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked
or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient temperature sensor caused by the snowplow. In addition, on
vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC), it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature
be manually controlled should the system not perform as
desired while in automatic mode. Both the outside temperature display and ATC operation will return to normal when the snowplow is removed.
General Maintenance
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the
plow manufacturer’s instructions.

When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drivetrain damage, the following precautions should be observed.
• Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small
or congested areas where speeds are not likely to
exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in
4H.
• Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4L
range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended
periods of time to avoid transmission overheating.
• Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has
returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a
practice of stepping on the brake pedal before shifting
the transmission.

Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery
terminals clean and free of corrosion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 365

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition

Wheels OFF The Two-Wheel Drive
Ground
Models

Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions

Flat Tow

Dolly Tow
On Trailer

NONE

Front
Rear
ALL

NOT ALLOWED

• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)

• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

366 STARTING AND OPERATING

5. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towwill result.
ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
CAUTION!
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
• Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
improper towing is not covered under the New
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
may leak from the transmission, causing damage
3. Firmly set the parking brake. Place the transmission in
to internal parts.
PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 367

Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE: Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) for recreational towing. Automatic transmissions must be shifted
into PARK for recreational towing. Refer to the following
for the proper transfer case NEUTRAL (N) shifting
procedure for your vehicle.

CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when recreational towing.
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Automatic transmissions must be placed in the
PARK position for recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to
be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case, causing
damage to internal parts.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

368 STARTING AND OPERATING

Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) – Manual Shift
Transfer Case (If Equipped)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.

WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.

CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Turn OFF the engine.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 369

9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with transmission in DRIVE.
10. Turn OFF the engine.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.

12. Shift the transmission into PARK.

CAUTION!

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.
13. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.

Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N) – Manual Shift
Transfer Case (If Equipped)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.

14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL
(N), turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid
tow bar.
gear clash.
15. Release the parking brake.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

370 STARTING AND OPERATING

7. Shift the transmission into PARK.

Shifting Into NEUTRAL – Electronic Shift Transfer
Case (If Equipped)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:

8. Release the brake pedal.
9. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
10. Start the engine.

WARNING!

11. Press and hold the brake pedal.
12. Release the parking brake.
13. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.

You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 371

CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.

light will blink while the shift is in progress. The light
will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to
NEUTRAL is complete.
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light
stays on, release the NEUTRAL button.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Shift automatic 8. Start the engine.
transmission into PARK.
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
2. Turn OFF the engine.
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but that there is no vehicle movement.
do not start the engine.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with transmission in DRIVE.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
12. Turn OFF the engine.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
13. Firmly apply the parking brake.
6. Press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL button
14. Shift the transmission into PARK.
(located by the selector switch). The NEUTRAL indicator
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

372 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL and the engine running. With the transfer
case in NEUTRAL, ensure that the engine is OFF
prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.
15. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
16. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
17. Release the parking brake.

• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to
pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL button is released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

NOTE:
• A flashing NEUTRAL indicator light indicates that
• The transfer case cannot be shifted into NEUTRAL
shift requirements have not been met.
from the 4WD AUTO (if equipped) position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

STARTING AND OPERATING 373

8. After the NEUTRAL button has been released, the
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL – Electronic Shift
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
Transfer Case (If Equipped)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for selector switch.
normal usage:
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL,
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con- turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear
nected to the tow vehicle.
clash.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

9. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but 10. Release the brake pedal.
do not start the engine.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
12. Start the engine.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
6. Press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL button
14. Release the parking brake.
(located by the selector switch) until the NEUTRAL
indicator light turns off.
15. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
7. After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off, release
the NEUTRAL button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

374 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
for a transfer case shift to take place and for the
prior to pressing the transfer case NEUTRAL button
position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
and must continue to be met until the shift has been
switch is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will
completed. If any of these requirements are not met
not take place and no position indicator lights will be
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, or are no
on or flashing.
longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL indicator
• A flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates
light will flash continuously until all requirements are
that shift requirements have not been met.
met or until the NEUTRAL button is released.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

▫ 3500 Models — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . 393

▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

䡵 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

䡵 Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

▫ Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob . . . . . 396

䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
WARNING!
upper switch bank just below the radio.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

(Continued)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 377

WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
3500 Models — If Equipped
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front
passenger seat. Lift the flap on the side of the seat for
access.
Remove the jack and tools by removing the wing bolt and
sliding the assembly from under the seat.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

6
Jack Location

378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Preparations For Jacking

WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them
in the original carrier and location. While driving
you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration, or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or
other objects in the vehicle may move around with
force, resulting in serious injury.
4500/5500 Models
These vehicles do not come equipped with a jack.

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.

WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
NOTE: Jacking and tire changing on 4500/5500 models
should be performed by an authorized dealer, or knowl- 3. Set the parking brake.
edgeable service personnel with the appropriate heavy
4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmisduty equipment, like a tire service company.
sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission). On 4-Wheel
drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the “4L” position.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 379

6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block the left
rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
Instructions

WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

(Continued)

380 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. If equipped, remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools
from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.

Jack Warning Label

3. When changing the front wheel, assemble the jack
drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
extension tube. Place the jack under the axle as close to
the tire as possible with the drive tubes extending to the
front. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 381

6
Front Jacking Locations

Rear Jacking Location

When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive
tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
extension tube. Securely place the jack under the sway
bar bracket (unless both tires are flat on one side, then
place jack under shock bracket) facing forward in vehicle.
Connect the jack tube extension and lug wrench.

Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
adjust the jack position as required.
NOTE: If the jack will not lower by turning the dial
(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the
jack drive tube in order to lower the jack.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

382 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the 6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
using a crisscross pattern. The correct nut tightness is
135 ft lbs (183 N·m) torque for single rear wheel (SRW)
WARNING!
models and 145 ft lbs (197 N·m) for dual rear wheel
models. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer
the vehicle unstable and cause a collision. It could
or at a service station.
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Alof the nuts toward the wheel on single rear wheel (SRW) ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel
models. On dual rear wheel models (DRW) the lug nuts in the places provided.
are a two-piece assembly with a flat face. Lightly tighten
the nuts. To avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, 7. Install wheel center cap (if equipped) and remove
do not fully tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel
center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap
lowered.
damage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 383

8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the jack
will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel) by hand,
it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to
lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and tools as
previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.

CAUTION!
Use extreme caution when removing the front and
rear center caps. Damage can occur to the center cap
and/or the wheel if screwdriver type tools are used. A
pulling motion, not a pry off motion, is recommended to remove the caps.

NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
For single rear wheel (SRW) models, use the blade on the
end of the lug wrench to pry the hub cap off. Insert the
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped
blade end into the pry off notch and carefully pop off the
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle
hub cap with a back and forth motion.
off the ground.
On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must
first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a
hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the
rear hub caps. Position the hook and pull out on the
ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel
skins can now be removed. For the front hub cap on
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When
the caps off. The wheel skin can now be removed.
replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the lug
nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a
CAUTION!
rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins
are firmly seated around the wheel.
• Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub
cap. Do not use a twisting motion when removing Dual Rear Wheels
the hub cap, damage to the hub cap; finish may Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The lug
nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are being
occur.
rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add two
• The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two
pry off notches. Make sure that the hook of the drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the
jack handle driver is located squarely in the cap washer.
notch before attempting to pull off.
You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the
wheel skins. Insert the flat tip completely and using a
back and forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this
procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 385

Dual wheel models require a special heavy-duty lug nut
tightening adapter (included with the vehicle) to correctly tighten the lug nuts. Also, when it is necessary to
remove and install dual rear wheels, use a proper vehicle
lifting device.
NOTE: When installing a spare tire (if equipped) as part
of a dual rear wheel end combination, the tire diameter of
the two individual tires must be compared. If there is a
significant difference, the larger tire should be installed in
a front location. The correct direction of rotation for dual
tire installations must also be observed.
Oiling Location

Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the
inner and outer wheels. Align these slots when assembling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the
inner wheel. The tires of both dual wheels must be
completely off the ground when tightening to insure
wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows:

Tightening Pattern (10 Studs)
Tightening Pattern (8 Studs)

1. Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to a
snug fit.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387

bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles/
kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to
become properly set. All nuts should first be firmly
seated against the wheel. The nuts should then be
tightened to recommended torque. Tighten the nuts to
It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued
final torque in increments. Progress around the bolt
to specifications at all times. Torque wheel stud nuts to
circle, tightening the nut opposite to the nut just previspecifications at each lubrication interval.
ously tightened until final torque is achieved. RecomWheel Nut Torque
mended torques are shown in the following chart.
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the
2. Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the
torques listed in the table. Go through the sequence a
second time to verify that specific torque has been
achieved. Retighten to specifications at 100 miles
(160 km) and after 500 miles (800 km).

Disc Wheels

TypeNut

StudSize

Hex Size

TorqueFt Lbs

Cone
Flanged

M14 x 1.5
M14 x 1.5

22 mm
22 mm

120-150
130-160

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

TorqueNewtonMeters
160-200
190-220

388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

To Stow The Flat Or Spare — If Equipped
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
Refer to Upfitters Body Builders Guide for information so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
on stowing your spare tire (if equipped).
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
HOISTING
A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking precautions.
locations. Refer to the graphics that show jacking locaCAUTION!
tions. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be
used on any other parts of the underbody.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any

CAUTION!
Never use a floor jack directly under the differential
housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle
may result.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster

other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.

WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389

Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.

WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

Positive Battery Post
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

Jump-Starting Procedure

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.

WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391

8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.

9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster spected at your authorized dealer.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
CAUTION!
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever
rhythmically between DRIVE/1st and REVERSE while
applying slight pressure to the accelerator.

CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in
NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

CAUTION! (Continued)
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE/1st and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

• Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury
or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.

Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a
vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.

NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.

CAUTION!

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
without starting the engine.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, press and hold the
Shift Lever Override Access Port
override tab through the access port (ringed circle) on the
6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
bottom of the steering column.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the
transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
Towing Condition

Flat Tow

Wheel Lift or Dolly
Tow
Flatbed

Wheels OFF
the Ground

NONE

Front
Rear
ALL

2WD Models

If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph max(48 km/h)
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance

OK
BEST METHOD

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

4WD Models
See instructions in “Recreational Towing” under “Starting and Operating”
• Auto Transmission in PARK
• Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT
Neutral)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD

396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to
vehicles under tow must be observed.

CAUTION!
Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.

Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
position, not the ACC position.
approved method of towing without the ignition key is
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, see “Shift Lever with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necesOverride” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instruc- sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the
PARK position for towing.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397

Two-Wheel Drive Models
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
15 miles (24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmisflatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear
sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUsteering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the
TRAL. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) and the
straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the
distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
front wheels on the ground.

CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe damage to the transmission. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the
forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF
the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is
in PARK (for automatic transmissions) or in gear (NOT
in Neutral, for manual transmissions). Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.

CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when towing.
• Failure to follow these towing methods can cause
severe damage to the transmission and/or transfer
case. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

. . . . . . . 402

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 402

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

▫ Front Prop Shaft Lubrication – Four-Wheel
Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

▫ Dual Or Quad Headlamp/Front Park And
Turn Signal – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

▫ Rear Axle And 4X4 Front Driving Axle Fluid
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

▫ Fog Lamps – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
With Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Cab Top Clearance Lamps – If Equipped . . . . 447
䡵 Fluid Capacities

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 450

▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . 435

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L

7
1
2
3
4
5
6

— Air Cleaner Filter
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Battery

7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
soon as possible.
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403

the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
problem continues, the message will appear the next time system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacethe vehicle is started.
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
PROGRAMS
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enengine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your warranty.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405

DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

(Continued)

406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
top of the safe zone on these engines.

CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler
Identification Symbol
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
This symbol means that the oil has your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
been certified by the American location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining
Petroleum Institute (API). The Your Vehicle” for further information.
manufacturer only recommends
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certiAPI Certified engine oils.
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil
quality requirements are met and the recommended
maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.

station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only highquality filters should be used to assure most efficient
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high-quality oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and filter and are recommended.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
maintenance intervals.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409

WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.

Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

(Continued)

410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411

Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System Body Lubrication
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres- Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubriRefrigerant Recovery And Recycling
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroMOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
Protection Agency (EPA) and is an ozone-saving product.
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
However, the manufacturer recommends that air condiconcerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or
grit. After lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
other service facilities using recovery and recycling
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
equipment.
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
Front Prop Shaft Lubrication – Four-Wheel Drive
When performing other underhood services, the hood
Models
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil cleaned and lubricated.
change. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. Use MOPAR威 Type MS6560 (lithium-based grease), or equivalent.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
function.

Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a Adding Washer Fluid
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula- The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should
be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
tions of salt or road film.
reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not raOperation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
diator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid resermay cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
voir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help
from a dry windshield.
blade performance.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This Exhaust System
rating information can be found on most washer fluid The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
containers.
system.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
WARNING!
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exCommercially available windshield washer solvents
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damare flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
must be exercised when filling or working around
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
the washer solution.
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubriAfter the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield
washer solution used with water as directed on the
container, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point
to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.

• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417

Cooling System

WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to
open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator
is hot.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.

CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
(Continued) coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419

Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainOrganic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant tain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
the vehicle is operated.
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
equivalent.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.

Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.

• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Checking Coolant Level – 5.7L Engine
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be between the MIN and MAX range on
the dipstick.
To check the coolant level:
1. Open the coolant reservoir.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421

2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the reservoir 3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.
neck.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is • Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
a month.
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
freezing.
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporand distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
enter the radiator.
Points To Remember

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.

WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service or immediately
if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic
reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a
“MAX” dot and an “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be
kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the
MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425

WARNING! (Continued)

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level
For models with 9.25 in Front Axles and 11.5 in Rear
Axles, refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. For
normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons,
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected.

When checking the fluid level (4500/5500 only), the
(Continued) vehicle should be in a level position. The fluid level
should be 1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

fill hole on the front axle. The fluid level should be level Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
with the bottom of the fill hole on the rear axle.
Drain And Refill
Lubricant Selection
On 4500/5500 vehicles, remove the lower bolt to drain Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
the axle fluid.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials DO NOT REQUIRE any
limited slip oil additive (friction modifiers).

1 — 4500/5500 Rear Axle Fluid Fill Plug
2 — 4500/5500 Rear Axle Fluid Drain Plug

NOTE: Slight noise and mild shuddering may be evident while turning a vehicle with limited slip differential
on concrete or dry pavement. These conditions should be
considered normal operation of the limited slip
differential.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427

Transfer Case

Automatic Transmission

Drain And Refill
Selection Of Lubricant
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
maintenance intervals.
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transLubricant Selection
mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be mainFluid Level Check
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler fluid.
plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the
CAUTION!
filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.
• Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid
will require more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be checked when the engine is
fully warmed up and the fluid in the transmission is at
normal operating temperature. Operation of the transmission with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce
the life of the transmission and of the fluid. Check the
fluid level whenever the vehicle is serviced.

Fluid Level Check – 5.7L Engine
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature 82°C (180°F). This occurs after at
least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating
temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably beSpecial Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered tween the fingertips.
product and its performance may be impaired by supple- To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi- the following procedure must be used:
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid 1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as temperature.
they may adversely affect seals.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429

NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
pedal.
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room tem4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi- perature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
tion ending with the lever in PARK.
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
seated.
normal operating temperature.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
CAUTION!
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operatBe aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
ing temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on
(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After
produce an accurate reading.
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait
a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into
7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
Automatic Transmission Fluid And Filter Change
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
maintenance intervals.
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
NOTE: If the transmission is disassembled for any
have an adverse affect on paint, metal trim, and underreason, the fluid and filter(s) should be changed.
body protection.
It is important that proper lubricant is used in the
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
resistance built into your vehicle.
information.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.

The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

CAUTION!

Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
a month.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
open.
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a
the owner.
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.

Special Care
•

•

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433

CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap
residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Interior Care
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manUse MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
ner:
upholstery and carpeting.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl
with a clean, dry towel.
upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to
stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435

Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may
scratch the elements. When cleaning the rearview mirror,
spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do
not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are FUSES
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care Totally Integrated Power Module
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be engine compartment near the battery. This center conused, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive tains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag. fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on
the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.

Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J01
40 Amp
Green
J02
30 Amp
Pink
J03
30 Amp
Pink
J04
J05

Totally Integrated Power Module

J06

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
40 Amp
Green

Mini
Fuse

Description
Trailer Tow
Electric Brake
Diesel Powertrain
Control Module – If
Equipped
Driver Door Node
Passenger Door Node
Antilock Brakes
Pump/Stability
Control System

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437

Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J07
30 Amp
Pink
J08
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
J15

40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
60 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Blue
40 Amp
Green

Mini
Fuse

Description
Antilock Brakes
Valve/Stability Control System
Power Seat

Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J17
40 Amp
Green
J18
20 Amp
Blue

Sway Bar Module – If
Equipped
Transfer Case Module

J19

Rear Defroster

J21

Main Ignition Off
Draw (IOD) Fuse
Trailer Tow Lamps/
Park Lamps
Front Blower

J22

J20

M1
M5

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Mini
Fuse

Description
Starter Motor Solenoid
Powertrain Control
Module Transmission
Range
Rad Fan Motor HI/
Rad Fan Motor Low
Front Wiper Ground/
Low/High
Washer Control

60 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural

Sunroof Module
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural

Stop Switch Lamp
115V AC Inverter

438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M6

Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow

20 Amp
Yellow

20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue

M9
M10

M11

10 Amp
Red

Description
Power Outlet (Instrument Panel or Front
Console)/Rain Snsr
Power Outlet (Rear
Console or Center
Seat)
Front Heated Seat &
Steering Wheel
Rear Heated Seats
Hands Free Module/
Vanity Lamp/
Universal Garage
Door Opener Module
Climate Control System

Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M12
M13

M14
M15

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Mini
Fuse
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow

20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow

Description
Radio/Amplifier
Main #2 Instrument
Cluster/Wireless Control Module/ITM/
Siren/Multifunction
Switch (Steering Column Module)
Back Up Camera
(Domestic Only)
Power Seat
Module(s)/Audio
Telematics/Daytime
Running Lights
Relay/Instrument
Cluster/Transfer Case
Module

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439

Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M16
M18
M19
M20

M21
M22
M23

Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue

20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red

Description

Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M25

Airbag Module

Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow

Center Stop Lamp
M26
Automatic Shutdown
1 and 2
Instrument Cluster
Interior Lighting /Sw
Steering Wheel/Sw
Bank
Automatic Shutdown
3
Horns (Low/High) –
Right
Horns (Low/High) –
Left

M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red

Description
Fuel Pump Motor/
Diesel Lift Pump – If
Equipped
Driver’s Door Switch
Ignition Switch
Powertrain Control
Module
Tire Pressure Monitor
J1962 Diag Connector
Back-Up Lamps
Airbag Module

440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M33
M34

M35
M36

Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red

15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow

Description
Powertrain Control
Module
Park Assist Module/
Climate Control System Module/IR
Sensor/Compass
Module
Left Front & Rear
Parklamps
Power Outlet (Instrument Panel or Center
Console)

Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M37

M38

Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red

25 Amp
Natural

Description
Antilock Brakes/
Stability Control System Module/
Stoplamp Switch
All Door Lock &Unlock

CAUTION!
• When installing the totally integrated power module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the totally
integrated power module and possibly result in a
electrical system failure.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441

CAUTION! (Continued)
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.

• As an alternative to the above steps you may disconnect the negative cables from both batteries.
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.

VEHICLE STORAGE
NOTE:
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we • When reinstalling the IOD fuse push firmly until fully
recommend that you take the following steps to miniseated; the gauges in the instrument cluster will do a
mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
full sweep when the ignition switch is turned to the
RUN position. This is a normal condition.
• Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse located in
the Integrated Power Module, located in the engine • When the vehicle is shipped from the factory, the IOD
compartment. The IOD cavity includes a snap-in refuse is in the up or extracted position. If the radio,
tainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected without
interior lamps, keyless entry or other features do not
removing it from the fuse block.
work with the key OFF, check the position of the fuse
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

(or check to see if the fuse is blown) to ensure that it is
fully seated. When the IOD fuse is extracted, the
instrument cluster in the odometer window will display ⬙NO FUSE.”

LIGHT BULBS – Exterior
Bulb No.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . . . . 921
Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Dual Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
Quad Headlamp – Low Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Quad Headlamp – High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Dual Headlamp) . . . . . 3157K
LIGHT BULBS – Interior
Bulb No. Front Turn Signal Lamp (Quad Headlamp) . . . 3157NA
Overhead Console Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TS 212-2 Rear Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7679 Cab Roof Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194NA
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443

BULB REPLACEMENT
Dual Or Quad Headlamp/Front Park And Turn
Signal – If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the four plastic push-in fasteners that secure
the upper radiator seal to the grille support and both
fender ledges.
4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that secure the
upper radiator seal to the radiator.

7. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front
wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the
access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield.
6. Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment
Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this
screws.
access hole.
5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

8. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house 10. Disconnect electrical connectors.
splash shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to
11. Replace bulb(s) as necessary.
disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front
lamp unit housing.

CAUTION!

• Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb
socket, or the lamp wiring.
NOTE: There are access covers over both headlamp
bulb access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing (if
equipped). These covers MUST be reinstalled after the
9. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grasp the outboard bulb has been replaced.
edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disengage the ball stud from the plastic grommet.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445

Fog Lamps – If Equipped

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With
Cargo Lamp

1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to access
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to
the back of the front fog lamp housing.
the body as shown.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector
from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise 1⁄4 turn to unlock the
bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.

CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wir- 3. Turn the desired bulb socket 1⁄4 turn and remove the
ing harness to the body.
socket and bulb from housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447

Cab Top Clearance Lamps – If Equipped

CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.

1. Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp.

• Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
• Inside Bulb: Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Rotate the socket 1⁄4 turn and pull it from the lamp 3. Pull the bulb straight from it’s socket and replace.
assembly.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449

FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Standard Rear Tank
Optional Midship Tank
Engine Oil with Filter
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System
5.7L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent.

U.S.

Metric

52 Gallons
22 Gallons

197 Liters
83 Liters

7 Quarts

6.6 Liters

18.7 Quarts

17.7 Liters

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine

Engine Oil Filter – 5.7L Engine
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5–Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
LZFR5C–11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451

Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
(5.7L Engine Only)
Transfer Case
Front and Rear Axle Fluid
(4500/5500)
Brake Master Cylinder

Power Steering Reservoir

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
GL-5 SAE 75W-90 Synthetic (MS-9763) or equivalent.
MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 456 E

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
▫ 5.7L Gas Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E

454 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

5.7L Gas Engine
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
S conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
C driving. Inspection and service should also be done
H anytime a malfunction is suspected.
E
D
U
L
E
S

On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” message is displayed.
Depending on operating conditions, the message may
appear as early as 3,500 miles (5 630 km) since last reset.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
the next 500 miles (805 km).
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 455 M

NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.

referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.

• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your At Each Stop For Fuel
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, whichthe vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuever comes first.
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E

456 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

At Each Oil Change

Once A Month

• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Change the engine oil filter.
damage.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
CAUTION!
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake

master cylinder, power steering and transmission and
S
C
add as needed.
H
E • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
D
operation.
U
L
E
S

Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 457 M

8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4
only).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 only).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Date
Dealer Code

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 458 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
N
T 18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4
only).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 only).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 459 M

40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4
only).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 only).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Date
Dealer Code

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 460 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

56,000 miles (91 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4
only).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #

Date
Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 461 M

64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏

Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 64,000 miles (104 000 km).
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 only).
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, snow plowing, or
frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #

Date
Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 462 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
N
T 54 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4
only).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) whichever
comes first.
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 only).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 463 M

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E

88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4
only).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Date
Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

M 464 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
T
E ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156 000 km).
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
A ❏ Replace the spark plugs.
N ❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
C ❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 only).
E ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

❏
❏
❏
❏
❏

Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
replace
❏ Inspect

the transfer case fluid.
the brake linings, replace if necessary.
the CV joints.
exhaust system.
the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
if necessary.
the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #

Date
Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 465 M

104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4
only).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.
❏ Flush and replace power steering fluid.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 only).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Date
Dealer Code

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 466 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
A
N ❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 only).
C ❏ Inspect the CV joints.
E ❏ Inspect exhaust system.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #

Date
Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 467 M

128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 only).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #

Date
Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4
only).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Date
Dealer Code

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 468 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
A
N ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
C
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
E ❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4 only).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

❏
❏
❏
❏

Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #

Date
Dealer Code

Signature, Authorized Service Center

152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (4x4
only).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 469 M

WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 473

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

䡵 If You Need Assistance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 474

▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 474
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

472 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 473

the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

474 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
solved with this process.
Phone: (866) 726–4636
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
In Mexico contact:
center.
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenSante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 475

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.

the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

476 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.

WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 477

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.

In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., To order the following manuals, you may use either the
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masobtain other information about motor vehicle safety from tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are achttp://www.safercar.gov.
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

478 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

• Service Manuals
• Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
information that students and professional technicians
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vemaintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
capabilities and safety tips.
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
Call toll free at:
and charts.
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.

• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 479

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.

significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

480 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

INDEX

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

482 INDEX

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 418
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 408
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411,412
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256,260,411
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319,330
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,62,79,200
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200,308
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 19
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 260

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

INDEX 483

Automatic Transmission
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427,428
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427,451
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,426,451
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,426

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306,423
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,442

B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 25
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,79
Body Builders Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,451

Cab Top Clearance Lights . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . .
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

.
.
.
.

447
215
449
449

.
.
.
.

407
303
419
431

484 INDEX

Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,339
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93,255
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199,403
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,65
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,73
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223,232
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 246
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 419
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,420
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

INDEX 485

Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . 417
. . . . . . . . . . 420
. . . . . . . . . . 422
. . . . . . . . . . 419
. . . . . . . . . . 419
. . . . . . . 418,450
. . . . . . . . . . 172
. . . . . . . . . . 473

Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,258,264
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Dual Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,384
Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . .
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case . . . . . . .
Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

180
165
284
160
203
292
304

486 INDEX

Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 403
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,339
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,450
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 59
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,339
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,414
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408,450
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Flashers
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,153,189
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

INDEX 487

Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 450
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,200,445
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Octane Rating
Requirements
Tank Capacity
Fuses . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

335
335
449
435

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,402
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,26,123
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

488 INDEX

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,180
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 154
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Hazard
Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Hub Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,14
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . 154 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Guide, Body Builders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

INDEX 489

Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187,189
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Integrated Trailer Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . 68
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,147
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,62,79,200
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

490 INDEX

Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,164
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442,443
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Cap Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . 199
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442,443
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,153,443
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,200,445
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 189
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,426
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,196
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

INDEX 491

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. 409 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404,476
. 405 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
. 454
. 403 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382,384

Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .
Manual Transmission
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,57,60
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,210
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,210

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

492 INDEX

Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,450
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408,450
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402,403
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,477
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 314
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . 165,170
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

INDEX 493

Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,303
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . 417,419
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,426
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Rear Window, Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . 368,370

Shifting out of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,373
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 253
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 194,210
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,70
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

494 INDEX

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,39,79
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 48
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,68
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,140
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 418,450
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223,232
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

INDEX 495

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,370
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,373
Short Message Service (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,153,189
Sliding Rear Window
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325,326
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,273
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Steel Carcass Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,303
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266,441
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information . . . . . . . . 330

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

496 INDEX

Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 260
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 189
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,73
Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . 314,330
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,318,479
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,384
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314,315
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309,318
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Steel Carcass Ply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

INDEX 497

Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344,395
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278,427
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 21
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153,189,443

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

498 INDEX

UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 246 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Wheel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382,387
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315,342 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266,441
Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,156,413
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,413
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156,413 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency
signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must
be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must
be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the
battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
negative power connection should be made to body sheet
metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or
the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting
antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed
away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully
shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a
low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference
between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:

Chrysler Group LLC
12DD43-126-AD

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby
:

4th Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : 12DD43-126-AD
Create Date                     : 2012:03:07 09:03:50Z
Keywords                        : 875752
Modify Date                     : 2013:04:19 16:28:11-05:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2012 Ram Truck Chassis Cab Owner's Manual
Description                     : 4th Edition
Creator                         : 12DD43-126-AD
Subject                         : 875752
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Metadata Date                   : 2013:04:19 16:28:11-05:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.0.0 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:5a369e5d-55d2-4e30-b4b6-cc47f8f05a8f
Instance ID                     : uuid:796e22df-c1ed-4c17-9c66-338cb4b6efe2
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 502

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2012 Ram Truck Chassis Cab Owner's Manual Chassiscab

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation